Download - BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 1/217
GSM/EDGE BSS, Rel.
RG20(BSS), Operating
Documentation, Issue 08
Install
Installing
BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II /
240 XL IIB
DN0932994
Confidential
Nokia Siemens Networks is continually striving to reduce the adverse environmental effects of
its products and services. We would like to encourage you as our customers and users to join
us in working towards a cleaner, safer environment. Please recycle product packaging and
follow the recommendations for power use and proper disposal of our products and their compo-
nents.
If you should have questions regarding our Environmental Policy or any of the environmental
services we offer, please contact us at Nokia Siemens Networks for any additional information.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 2/217
2 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the
product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the
use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under whichthe document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted
in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The
documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,
and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes
customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity,
or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability
arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and
finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,
Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions
contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia
Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which
may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO
EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTA-
TION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDI-
RECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY
OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION
IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and
other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark
of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respectiveowners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2009. All rights reserved
f Important Notice on Product SafetyThis product may present safety risks due to laser, electricity, heat, and other sources
of danger.
Only trained and qualified personnel may install, operate, maintain or otherwise handle
this product and only after having carefully read the safety information applicable to this
product.
The safety information is provided in the Safety Information section in the “Legal, Safety
and Environmental Information” part of this document or documentation set.
The same text in German:
f Wichtiger Hinweis zur ProduktsicherheitVon diesem Produkt können Gefahren durch Laser, Elektrizität, Hitzeentwicklung oder
andere Gefahrenquellen ausgehen.
Installation, Betrieb, Wartung und sonstige Handhabung des Produktes darf nur durch
geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal unter Beachtung der anwendbaren Sicherheits-
anforderungen erfolgen.
Die Sicherheitsanforderungen finden Sie unter „Sicherheitshinweise“ im Teil „Legal,
Safety and Environmental Information“ dieses Dokuments oder dieses Dokumentations-
satzes.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 3/217
DN0932994 3
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Table of contentsThis document has 217 pages.
Summary of changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1 Purpose of the manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Installation prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.3 Handling of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Base station installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.1 Position in the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.2 Site requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.3 Site configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4 Construction overview of the BS-types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.4.1 Rack configuration of different BS-variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.4.1.1 Rack configurations BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4.1.2 Rack configurations of the BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.4.1.3 Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.4.1.4 Rack configurations for BS-240XL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.4.1.5 Rack configurations for BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4.1.6 Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.5 Equipment delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5.1 Preliminary checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5.2 Rack mounted on a pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5.3 Rack shipped in a crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322.5.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.5.5 Rack installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.5.5.1 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.5.5.2 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.5.6 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B) . . . . . 45
2.5.7 Back-to-back assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3 External cabling activit ies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.2 Ground and AC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
3.3 Ground and DC- power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3.4 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3.4.2 Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm. . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.4.3 Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.4.4 Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3.4.5 Abis-interface with ETHCON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.5 Connection of external alarm sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.5.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.5.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.6 Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893.8 External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 4/217
4 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
3.9 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . . . . 97
3.10 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 100
3.11 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 102
3.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-5 - internal alarms / DC supply . . . . . 1043.13 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3.14 Antenna connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.14.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
3.15 Installation of TMA or MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
3.15.1 Installation of the TMADV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
3.15.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
3.15.3 Installation of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4 Rack completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.1 Preparation of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.2 Overview of battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.3 Installation of backup batteries in service rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.3.1 Installation of backup batteries type “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.3.2 Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.3.3 Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker” . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.4 Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4.4.1 Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
4.4.2 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4.4.3 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . . 145
4.4.4 Battery alarm cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4.4.5 DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
4.4.6 DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1524.4.7 -48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . 153
4.4.8 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . 154
4.4.9 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . 155
4.4.10 CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II . . . . . . . . . . 157
4.4.11 CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB, BS-240XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
4.4.12 CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II. . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.4.13 CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.5 Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.5.1 Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
4.5.2 Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks. . . . . . . . . 168
4.5.3 Battery cabling activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
4.5.4 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension . . . . . . 171
4.5.5 -48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension. . . . . 172
4.5.6 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
4.5.7 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.5.8 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension. . . . . . 177
4.5.9 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension. . . . . 178
4.5.10 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
4.5.11 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.5.12 SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.6 Combination of racks with different heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1824.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 5/217
DN0932994 5
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
4.7 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.7.1 BS-240XLU II, Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB, Base. . . . 183
4.8 Installation of link equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
4.8.1 Installation of microwave equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1894.8.2 Installation of NTPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.9 Installation of modules and cover parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
4.10 Nonstandard installation works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.10.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.10.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.11 Setup of system cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.11.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.11.2 System Cabling with flexi-cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.11.3 Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.12 Post installation notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4.12.1 Leaving the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2104.12.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
5 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.1 Installation tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
5.2 Ancillary material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
5.3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.3.1 Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
5.3.2 Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.4 Checklist for Base Station Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 6/217
6 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
List of figuresFigure 1 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Figure 3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II . . . . 17
Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Figure 5 Site configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Figure 6 Rack types of the BS-240. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 7 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Figure 8 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Figure 9 Types of BS-240 II racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Figure 10 Types of BS-240U IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Figure 11 Types of BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Figure 12 Types of BS-240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 13 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Figure 14 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Figure 15 Rack mounted on the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 16 Dismounting the rack from the pallet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Figure 17 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Figure 18 Removal of the packing material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 19 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 20 Unpacking of the battery sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Figure 21 Removal of top cover for crane eye access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 22 Opening of rack door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Figure 23 Removal of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 24 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 25 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Figure 26 Guideline for crane transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Figure 27 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 28 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Figure 29 Floor and wall mounting of the racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 30 Earthquake mounting kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Figure 31 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 32 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Figure 33 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 34 Mounting of pos. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 35 Mounting of stiffening parts (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 36 Mounting of stiffening parts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 37 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Figure 38 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Figure 39 Claws for the front feet before mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 40 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Figure 41 Back-to-back configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Figure 42 Side-by-side configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 43 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2 . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 44 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 7/217
DN0932994 7
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Figure 46 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Figure 47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack. . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack. . . . . . . . . . . 57
Figure 49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Figure 50 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 51 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 52 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 53 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack. . . . . . . . 60
Figure 54 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack . . . . . . . 60
Figure 55 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Figure 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 58 Locations of the connectors for external cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 59 Ground and AC mains connections (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 60 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack) . 65Figure 61 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Figure 62 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Figure 63 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 64 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 65 Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment, 120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 66 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment, 120 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 67 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 68 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT. . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 69 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Figure 70 ETHCON module, connected via FE0 and FE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 71 ETHCON, external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 72 ETHCON trace adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Figure 73 ACTM terminal numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Figure 74 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 75 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 76 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 77 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 78 Routing of external alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Figure 79 Assembly guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 80 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 81 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Figure 82 Label with terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 83 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 84 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Figure 85 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 86 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 87 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 88 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Figure 89 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Figure 90 Tools for jumper fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 91 Parts of the connector unit kit (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 92 Using the trimming tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 8/217
8 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Figure 93 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor. . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 94 Removal of metal particles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Figure 95 Assembly of the connector unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 96 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Figure 97 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 98 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 99 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 100 Opening of the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 101 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 102 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 103 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 104 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 105 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 106 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 107 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Figure 108 TMA with mounting brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Figure 109 Example of STMAx and DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 110 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Figure 111 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 112 Example of pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 113 Contents of the connection kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 114 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 115 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II) . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 116 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 117 Paint retouch of the top cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 118 Placement of the sealing profile tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 119 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 120 Parts for battery fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 121 Placement of the spacer strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 122 Preparation of the battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Figure 123 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 124 Connection of backup battery set “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 125 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 126 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Figure 127 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 128 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Figure 129 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3 . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 130 Placement and connection of the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Figure 131 Detail of the connection of battery 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Figure 132 Parts of the air vent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 133 Routing of the air vent tubes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 134 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection . . . . . . . . 138
Figure 135 Terminal blocks for battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 136 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 137 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3). . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 138 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 139 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 9/217
DN0932994 9
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Figure 140 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1). . . . . . . . 147
Figure 142 Battery alarm cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 143 Routing of the DC power supply wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Figure 144 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 145 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Figure 146 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Figure 147 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3) . 152
Figure 148 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1). 153
Figure 149 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) 154
Figure 150 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 155
Figure 151 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) 156
Figure 152 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Figure 153 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 154 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 155 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 156 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 157 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 158 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 160 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 163 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 164 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks. 166
Figure 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . 168
Figure 167 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 168 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Figure 169 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1. . . . . 171
Figure 170 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 172
Figure 171 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1) . 173
Figure 172 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 173 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3) . 175
Figure 174 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) 176
Figure 175 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1 177Figure 176 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1178
Figure 177 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2 . . . . . 179
Figure 178 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2 . . . . 180
Figure 179 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension) . . . . . . . 182
Figure 180 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module . . 183
Figure 181 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension . . . 183
Figure 182 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks . . . . . . . . . 184
Figure 183 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks185
Figure 184 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext. / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack . 186
Figure 185 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 186 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 10/217
10 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Figure 187 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 188 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II) . . 191
Figure 189 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II) . . . 191
Figure 190 Overview of microwave cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Figure 191 Overview of NTPM cabling variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 192 Interfaces on frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 193 Fixing variants of the modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 194 Handling of the lever mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 195 Location of the code key no.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 196 Components of the AC/DC frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 197 Fitting of the air flaps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Figure 198 Setup of the rubber sealing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 199 Plug-in of the fan cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 200 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91 . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Figure 202 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 203 Connection of DC and battery cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 204 Routing of the battery breaker cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Figure 205 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Figure 206 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Figure 207 Example of system cabling with flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 11/217
DN0932994 11
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
List of tablesTable 1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension racks . . . . 27
Table 2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Table 4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Table 6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Table 8 Gap between Service1 and Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 9 Interrack-cables without extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Table 10 Types of flexible conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Table 11 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 12 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Table 13 Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 74Table 14 Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector) . . . . . . . 75
Table 15 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Table 16 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Table 17 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Table 18 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 20 Pin assignments ACTM connector X5...X8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Table 23 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Table 24 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Table 25 Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female) . . . . . . . . . 94
Table 26 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Table 27 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Table 28 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 29 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Table 30 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Table 31 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Table 32 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . 104
Table 34 Pin assignments of the LMT interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Table 36 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 37 Types of the MHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Table 38 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Table 39 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II) . . . . . . . . . 127
Table 40 Battery charging modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Table 41 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Table 42 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Table 44 List of temp-resistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Table 45 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 12/217
12 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d80580890e12
Confidential
Table 46 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Table 47 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
145
Table 48 Battery sensor cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Table 49 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Table 50 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Table 51 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
152
Table 52 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
153
Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) . . . 154
Table 54 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1) . .
156
Table 55 Example for CAN-Bus cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Table 56 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 57 CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Table 58 List of CC-link cables BS-240 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Table 59 List of CC-link cables BS-240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Table 60 CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Table 61 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Table 63 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks . . . . 167
Table 64 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Table 65 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks .
169
Table 66 Overview of the tempresistor cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Table 67 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3) . . 172
Table 68 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1) . 173
Table 69 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets) .
181
Table 70 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets) . 181
Table 71 CC-cables l=3,20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . 185
Table 72 CC-cables l=6,10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks) . 186
Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Table 74 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
192
Table 75 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Table 76 Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT 195
Table 77 Module HW code key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 80 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Table 81 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU . . . . . 208
Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Table 84 Checklist for BS-240/240XL Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 13/217
DN0932994 13
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Summary of changes
Id:0900d805805c3a78
Confidential
Summary of changesChanges between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
issue contains all changes made to previous issues.
Issue 01 for release RG10(BSS)
Issue Date Summary
01 07/2009 First edition for release RG10(BSS)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 14/217
14 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805805c3a78
Confidential
Summary of changes
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 15/217
DN0932994 15
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Introduction
Id:0900d805805c36f7
Confidential
1 Introduction
f Important!
The CE declaration of conformity for the product will be fulfilled if the setup and cabling
is undertaken in accordance with the specification in the manual and the documentation
listed there, such as mounting instructions, cable lists etc. Where necessary, project-
specific documentation should be taken into account.
Deviations from the specifications or independent changes during setup, such as use of
cable types with lower screening values, for example, can lead to the CE requirements
being violated. In such cases the CE declaration of conformity is invalidated and the
responsibility passes to the person who has caused the deviations.
The applying technical standards are listed in the “Guide to Documentation”
(Siemens document number A30808-X3247-K52-*-7635).
1.1 Purpose of the manual
This document is intended to provide the information necessary for the installation of the
BS-240 / BS-240 II and BS-240XL / BS-240XL II in the Base Station System ( BSS).
It contains a description of all the necessary steps to install the BTS on site and integrate
it into the required infrastructure. The document includes information on the following:
– Equipment delivery
– Preliminary checks
– Unpacking the racks and devices
– Rack installation
in addition to information regarding the connection of the base station to:
– Power supply
– PCM - Network
– Site ground system
– Receive / transmit antenna system
– Alarm connections
– Mechanical and electrical connection of the racks
For installation of equipment not supplied by Siemens (battery chargers, antennas,
power supplies, microwave etc.) refer to site specific documentation or vendor instruc-
tions provided with other equipment.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 16/217
16 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805805c36f7
Confidential
Introduction
1.2 Installation prerequisites
It is required that the installer pays attention to all relevant national EMC standards.
– EMF standard relevant for the choice of the antenna, the placement of the antennas
and the max. output power of the BTS (cell coverage).
– Use the correct material as described in this manual.
– Installation according to the standards EN 50310 or ETS 300253, EN 50154 and the
hints in this manual.
– The other equipment on site must be CE designated and must provide interfaces for
connecting of external cables conformable to EMC instructions.
The installation staff should have a basic knowledge of the relevant standards. The
installation manual must be available for staff on site.
1.3 Handling of the modules
All boards and modules must be handled with extreme care as each one contains elec-
trostatically sensitive devices (ESD). The modules are marked with the ESD-label.
These are sensitive to static discharge.
Figure 1 ESD Symbol
Notice:
– Avoid handling the modules in a high-static environment. – When handling the modules, do not touch connector contacts.
– An ground high-impedance wrist strap must be worn when handling modules.
– Use the socket at the racks for wrist strap connection.
– The modules must be transported in appropriate packaging.
Figure 2 ESD jack for wrist strap connection of BS-240 / 240XL
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 17/217
DN0932994 17
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Introduction
Id:0900d805805c36f7
Confidential
Figure 3 ESD press-stud for wrist strap connection of BS-240 II / 240 XL II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 18/217
18 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
2 Base station installation
2.1 Position in the systemThe BS-240/240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II interconnects the MS via the Um interface
with the trunk network via the Abis interface.
Figure 4 Position of the base station within the SBS
2.2 Site requirements
The installation site must fulfill installation rules according to ETS 300253 or EN 50310
and EN 50174.
The lightning protection measures must be in accordance with IEC 61312, IEC 61024and IEC 61663 (in the future series IEC 62305-3 to IEC 62305-5) to achieve a lightning
protection zone 1 interface to the communication equipment.
With regard to explosion hazards, the installation room of the base transceiver station
with integral battery back-up system must be guarantee a continuous ventilation, to
keep the critical hydrogen concentration below 4% vol.
The cross section of the air inlet / outlet must be calculated in accordance to
IEC/EN50272-2.
The construction of the room in which the base transceiver station is to be housed must
be complete and the room in good condition and dry (the humidity must not exceed 60
%), heaters if necessary, should be placed inside the room.
The BS-240 / 240XL and BS-240 II / 240XL II are intended to be installed in an area with
restricted access.
It is important, that the installation site and the transportation route meets the valid floor
load requirements. If the floor load rating is unknown, be sure to find out with a building
engineer or another appropriate professional during the site acquisition.
Prior to the commencement of installation, the site must have been prepared as follows:
– The installing room should be free from possible water ingress, frost and excessive
insect attacks.
– Doors and windows must already have been installed and must be lockable.
– Openings in walls, ceiling or floor - if required - must be complete.
– Room lighting and wall outlets must have been installed.
Um
Abis
interface
Asub
interface
A
interface
SB S
BT S BS C T RA U MS C
interface
MobileStatio n
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 19/217
DN0932994 19
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
– Heating or air-conditioning systems should be ready for operation.
– Walls and ceilings should have been painted. The room must be clean.
– A minimum floor space of 1,70 m x 1,50 m must be provided
(if later extension is not foreseen). – Cable runways should be installed first.
– All installation works of 3 phase 230 V AC power supply, including the circuit
breakers in the AC-distribution panel (mechanically coupled), must be finished.
To prevent subsequent accumulation of dust and dirt, the parts and equipment units to
be installed should be unpacked outside the room (if possible).
After that it is advantageous to install the BTS, after all other installation works to create
the required infrastructure (power supply, antenna cabling, PCM line...) are complete.
2.3 Site configuration
Operation of the base station requires additional equipment on site:
Figure 5 Site configuration
2.4 Construction overview of the BS-types
The base station equipment of the BS-240 / 240 II is housed in racks with the dimen-
sions of 1600 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The overall dimensions of the BS-
240 IIB are 1530 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D). The Base rack and each optional
Extension rack can be equipped with up to 8 Carrier Units.
The base rack and the extension rack of the BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240XL IIB can be
equipped with up to 12 Carrier Units. The dimensions of a BS-240XL / 240 XL II rack are
2025 mm x 600 mm x 450 mm (H x W x D) and BS-240XL IIB 1831 mm x 600 mm x 450
mm (HxWxD).
TX/RX antennas
external alarms**
3 x 230V/50Hz AC
PCM24/30 2 Mbit/s
AC-counter/ main breakers
microwave outdoor unit *
*dependent on type of network integration
**optional
(or -48 V DC)
in power distribution box
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 20/217
20 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
For a full-featured Base Station, the maximum number of TRX is limited to 24 with CUs
and 48 with the use of FCUs.
The necessary space for installation is shown in Figure 27. Because of the flexible con-
figuration, several cable kits will be used for cable connections between the racks.The first rack of Base Station is called Base rack and contains the following modules:
Generic modules:
Core Basis (COBA): Essential components are the base core controller (BCC), the
advanced clock generation (ACLK), the carrier unit interfaces (CC-Link), the PCM30/24
Abis interfaces, the internal system alarm interface, the LMT interface and an interface
to one satellite (COSA) to expand the COBA.
The priority tasks of the module are the local controlling of the BTSE, the generating of
system clocks, providing all interfaces, routing data to the CU and handling and provid-
ing O&M messages.
Core Satellite (COSA): The task of the COSA is to expand the number of Abis interfaces
and CC-links of the core. The essential components are the framing and line interface
(FALC) that provides the PCM30/24 port, the serial interface controller (SELIC) provid-
ing the CU-interface and the BUS-interface to the COBA. The COSA will be controlled
via a satellite interface by the COBA. To apply the feature cross connect, a COSA has
to be installed always into the base rack.
Alarm Collection Terminal (ACT): Collect all alarms for those units having no access to
the CAN-Bus and pass them via CAN-Bus interface to COBA.
Overvoltage Protection and Tracer (OVPT): Protects the PMC30 ports of core boards
from overvoltage and provides the monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines.
Abis Connection Module (ABISCON): Provides the interface between the base rack and
the peripheral Abis-cables. The ABISCON carries monitoring interfaces for connected Abis-lines and serves as interface for external synchronization clock.
Carrier related modules:
Carrier Unit (CU): Consists of a receiving and transmitting part with synthesizer and
power amplifier, a signal processing unit as well as a power supply unit.
EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU): CU with supporting EDGE functionality in the up- and down
link.
Flex Carrier Unit (FCU): The FlexCU is a two-carrier unit and based on the ECU. The
FCU allows the expansion of the number of TRX per BTSE up to max. 48.
Antenna Combining Modules:
Duplexer Amplifier Multicoupler (DUAMCO): The DUAMCO consists of two identical
modules. Each module contains a duplex filter, that combines the TX and RX path
together, to be fed a common antenna. If more than 2 carriers have to be combined to
a antenna system (with DUAMCO 2:2), a DUAMCO 4:2 or DUAMCO 8:2 has to be used.
Flexible Duplexer and Multicoupler (FDUAMCO): For each frequency band one type
of the FDUAMCO unit is available, that can be configurated with jumper cables for the
One-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 2.2) or Two-to-One mode (=DUAMCO 4:2). To provide
a DUAMCO 8:2 functionality, a COAMCO8 is required in addition to the FDUAMCO.
Co-Duplexer and Multicoupler Extension (COAMCO8): The COAMCO8 is used with a
FDUAMCO together to provide a 8:2 configuration.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 21/217
DN0932994 21
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Filter Combiner (FICOM): One base module of the FICOM is needed per cell and is able
to combine the TX path of two carriers to one antenna. The base module can be
expanded with up to 3 expansion modules if more than 2 carriers should be combined
to one antenna. The expansion modules is able to combine 2 carriers in addition. In
maximum 8 carrier, that belongs to the same cell can be combined to one antenna.
DI-Amplifier Multicoupler (DIAMCO): The DIAMCO consists of two independend
modules. Every module contains an RX-filter, a low noise amplifier (LNA), an attenuator,
a second LNA and a power splitter. The DIAMCO splits the RX antenna signal and can
drive up to 8 receiver inputs. Via the antenna feeder cable the DC power for the tower
mounted amplifier will be delivered by the DIAMCO.
High Power Duplexer (HPDU): The main task of the HPDU is to combine the TX- and
the RX-path to one antenna, in order to minimize the number of antennas if the FICOM
module is used.
Multiple Duplexer (MDUX / HYBRID6): The MDUX unit consists of six identical
Modules (0…5), each having transmit and receive path with one antenna port. Eachmodule has one TX input, four RX outputs and one RX cascading output. For each
MDUX two HYBRID6 are available to change the standard 6:6 configuration to 12:6.
For the Base Rack to function a Service Rack can be installed close to the Base Rack.
If only one Service Rack is located on site, it contains all infrastructure equipment:
AC/DC Converter (ACDC): Converts the AC mains voltage into the -48 Vdc supply
voltage.
Link Equipment (LE): Can be NTPM, if terrestrial line is used for the connection to BSC
or microwave units.
Backup Batteries: Guarantees continuous operation for a certain time in case of mains
breakdown or AC/DC converter failure.
g NOTE
All empty slots in a partially equipped subrack must be closed with cover plates so that
the air flow inside the rack will not be affected.
Cover plates are not necessary for link equipment and empty battery trays.
2.4.1 Rack configuration of different BS-variants
The following rack types exist:
– Base rack: Contains the core modules, up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240IIB)
or up to 12 carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB ) and antenna combiners.
– Extension rack: Contains up to 8 carrier units (BS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB) or up to 12
carrier units (BS240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB) and antenna combiners.
– Service1 rack: Contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and l ink equipment in
flexible configuration.
– Service1A rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains up to 6 AC/DC converters, an
AC/DC distribution panel with Alarm Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link
equipment in flexible configuration.
– Service2 rack: Contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-
tion.
– Service2 rack (BS-240 II / 240XL II): Contains a DC-LE Breaker Panel with Alarm
Collection Terminal, backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configuration.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 22/217
22 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
The minimum configuration for a BS-240 / 240 II with a maximum of 8 carrier units
requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case
of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the maximum number of carrier units (24) requires the Baserack, 2 Extension racks and a Service1 / Service1A rack.
For extension of link equipment or battery backup, additional Service2 racks can be
added.
The BS-240 / 240 II site can consists of up to a maximum of 8 racks (Base rack, 2 Exten-
sion racks, Service1/Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).
The minimum configuration for a BS-240XL / 240XL II with maximum 12 carrier units
requires a Base rack and a Service1 / Service1A rack (optional, not needed in the case
of -48 Vdc supply from external power supply equipment).
The serving of a site with the max. number of carrier units (24) requires the Extension
rack. For extension of link equipment or battery backup time, additional Service2 racks
can be added.
The number of Service racks depends on the number of installed carriers on site, the
volume of required link equipment and the expected battery backup time.
The BS-240XL / 240XL II site can consists of a maximum of 7 racks (Base rack, Exten-
sion rack, Service1 rack / Service1A rack, maximum 4 Service2 racks).
2.4.1.1 Rack configurations BS-240
Figure 6 shows the an example of rack types, that are needed for a BS-240 site with up
to 16 carriers.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 23/217
DN0932994 23
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 6 Rack types of the BS-240
Figure 7 Service1 rack configurations of the BS-240
LMT
ETHERNET
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU
#2CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O
# 0
M U
C O
# 1
C O B A 0
C O S A 0
C O B A
1
C O S A
1
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU
#2CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O
# 0
M U
C O
# 1
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4LE 5
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
Base Rack Extension RackService1 Rack
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
10 11 12 13 14 15
AC + DC Distribution
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
10 11 12 13 14 15
AC + DC Distribution
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
LE 7
LE 8
LE 9
LE 10
LE 11
LE 6
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
CTRL
AC/DC
CTRL
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
AC/DC
00 01 02 03 04 05
AC + DC Distribution
AC/DC
CTRL
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 24/217
24 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 8 Service2 rack configurations of the BS-240
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 7
LE 8
LE 9
LE 10
LE 11
LE 6
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
LE 7
LE 8
LE 9
LE 10
LE 11
LE 6
LE 0
LE 1
LE 2
LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 25/217
DN0932994 25
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
2.4.1.2 Rack configurations of the BS-240 II
The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 II is equal to the BS-240.
The rack layouts, are shown in the figure below (example of a 16 carrier site).
Figure 9 Types of BS-240 II racks
g NOTE
If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction
with the extension modules HYBRID6, one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOM
slot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1, MDUX#1 is allocated to the
ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above).Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates, excepted slots for link equipment
and empty battery trays.
2.4.1.3 Rack configurations of the BS-240 IIB
The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the
BS-240 II. The rack layouts, are shown in the following figure. (example of a DC-
supplied 16 carrier site).
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU
#2CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O #
0
M U C O #
1
C O B A
0
C O S A
0
C O B A
1
C O S A
1
SIEMENS
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O #
0
M U C O #
1
SIEMENS
Base Rack Extension Ra ckServi ce1A Rack
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06BR07BR08
ACTC
0V -48V BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC
0V -48V
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LE
AD Panel
0V -48V
LE Panel (S1A)
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Serv ice2 Rack
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
180A
BR 33
BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V X29
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 26/217
26 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 10 Types of BS-240U IIB racks
2.4.1.4 Rack configurations for BS-240XLThe following types of rack exist:
– Base rack (contains core modules, up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)
– Extension rack (contains up to 12 carrier units and antenna combiners)
– Service1 rack (contains AC/DC converters, backup batteries and link equipment in
flexible configuration)
– Service2 rack (contains backup batteries and link equipment in flexible configura-
tion)
Refer to Table 1, Table 2, Table 3 for a selection of rack configurations.
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7
ACOM
#4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CORE
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7
ACOM
#4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
Base shelter Extension 1 shelter Extension 2 shelter
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
CU
#4
CU
#5
CU
#6
CU
#7
ACOM
#4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 27/217
DN0932994 27
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 11 Types of BS-240XL racks
frame no. installed modules Base Rack installed modules Extension rack
4 (top) 4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or
4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or
2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or
4 x FICOM modules
(Base/Expansion modules in
site specific configuration)
4 x DUAMCO 2:2 or
4 x DUAMCO 4:2 or
2 x DUAMCO 8:2 or
4 x FICOM modules
(Base/Expansion modules in
site specific configuration)
3 4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO
4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO
2 4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO
4 x CU or ECU
2 x DIAMCO
1 (down) 4 x CU or ECU
2 x COBA;
2 x COSA
4 x CU or ECU
Table 1 Frame equipping variants, BS-240XL Base and Extension racks
SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS
FAN #0 FAN #1
FAN #2 FAN #3FAN #2 FAN #3
FAN #4 FAN #5
FAN #6 FAN #7
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOMACOMACOM
#3#2
CU
#0
CUCUCU
CU CU CU CU
CUCUCUCU#1
#2 #3
#4 #5
#6 #7
#8 #9
#10 #11
C O B A # 0
C O S A # 0
C O B A # 1
C O S A # 1
LMT
ETHERNET DC-PANEL
ACT-C
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM
CU CU CUCU
CU CUCU
CUCU CU CU
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
AC/ DC#00
AC/ DC#01
AC/ DC#02
AC/ DC#03
AC/ DC#04
AC/ DC#05
AC/ DC
#00CTRL
AC/ DC#10
AC/ DC#11
AC/ DC#12
AC/ DC#13
AC/ DC#14
AC/ DC#15
AC/ DC
#01CTRL
AC + DC DISTRIBUTION
#0
#2 #3
#11#10#5#4
#3#2#1
#8
#0
#9
#7#6#1
CU
FAN #2 FAN #3
FAN #0 FAN #1 FAN #0 FAN #1
FAN #4 FAN #5
FAN #6 FAN #7
LE #0LE #1LE #2
LE #3LE #4LE #5
LE #6
LE #7LE #8LE #9
LE #10
LE #11
1/4Battery
1/4
1/4 1/41/4
1/4
1/4
1/4Battery
BatteryBattery Battery
Battery
Battery
Battery
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension Rack
AC + DC DISTRIBUTION M U C O # 2
M U C O # 3
M U C O # 1
M U C O # 0
M U C O # 3
M U C O # 2
M U C O # 0
M U C O # 1
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU) or EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 28/217
28 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Service1 rack
frame
no.
type 1 type 2 type 3 type 4 type 5
4 (top) F:AC/DC1/1
2
F:AC/DC1/1
2
F:AC/DC1/1
2
F:AC/DC1/1
2
F:AC/DC1/1
2
3 F:LE F:LE F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2 F:AC/DC2
2 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:LE F:LE F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY (6 x LE) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
DC
Output
Power
up to 4000 W up to 8000 W
Table 2 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service1 rack
Service2 rack
frame no. type 1
(R:BS120)
type 2
(R:BS120)
4 (top) F:LE F:LE
3 (6 x LE) F:BATTERY
2 F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
1 (down) F:BATTERY F:BATTERY
Table 3 Equipping variants, BS-240XL Service2 rack
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 29/217
DN0932994 29
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
2.4.1.5 Rack configurations for BS-240XL II
The rack layouts of the BS-240XL II are shown in the figure below (example of a
24 carrier site).
Figure 12 Types of BS-240XL II racks
g NOTE
If the antenna combining will be done by Multiple Duplexer Units MDUX in conjunction
with the extension modules HYBRID6, one MDUX unit is placed into a double ACOMslot: MDUX#0 is allocated to the ACOM slots #0 and #1, MDUX#1 is allocated to the
ACOM slots #2 and #3 (see figure above).
Unequipped slots have to be closed by cover plates, excepted slots for link equipment
and empty battery trays.
2.4.1.6 Rack configurations for BS-240XL IIB
The site configuration of racks and the functionality of a BS-240 IIB is equal to the
BS-240 II. The rack layouts, are shown in the following figure. (example of a DC-
supplied 16 carrier site).
SIEMENSSIEMENSSIEMENS SIEMENS
#1
ACOMACOMACOM
#3#2
CU
#0
CUCUCU
CU CU CU CU
CUCUCUCU#1
#2 #3
#4 #5
#6 #7
#8 #9
#10 #11
A C O M # 4
A C O
M # 5
C O B A # 0
C O S A # 0
C O B A # 1
C O S A # 1
ACOMACOM ACOM ACOM
CU CU CUCU
CU CUCU
CUCU CU CU
#0
#2 #3
#11#10#5#4
#3#2#1
#8
#0
#9
#7#6#1
CU
Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack Extension Rack
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACTC ACTC
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#6 FAN#7
FAN#0 FAN#1
ACOM
#0
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#4 FAN#5
FAN#6 FAN#7
FAN#0 FAN#1
0V -48V
LE Panel (S1A)
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 6 for LE
HU # 7 for LE
HU # 8 for LE
HU # 9 for LE
HU # 10 for LE
HU # 11 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
FAN#2 FAN#3
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LEAD Panel
180A
BR33
BE1E2 BE1E2 10-48V X29
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Note: CU can be Carrier Unit (CU), EDGE Carrier Unit (ECU)or Flex Carrier Unit (FlexCU)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 30/217
30 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 13 Types of BS-240XL IIB racks
DCP
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7
ACOM #4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
CORE
FAN 0 FAN 1
FAN 2 FAN 3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7
ACOM #4
CU
#0
CU
#1
CU
#2
CU
#3
ACOM
#0
ACOM
#1
ACOM
#2
ACOM
#3
Base shelter Extension shelter
CU
#8
CU
#9
CU
#10
CU
#11
ACOM
#5
DCP
CU
#8
CU
#9
CU
#10
CU
#11
ACOM
#5
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 31/217
DN0932994 31
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
2.5 Equipment delivery
2.5.1 Preliminary checks
A ShockwatchTM -label and a TIP (N) TELLTM-label are fixed at the rack surface in the
case of pallet transportation or at the crate for indication of fallover or strong shocks
during the transport from factory to the site.
If the TIP (N) TELLTM-label arrow is blue, the package has been on the side or tipped
over in transit. If the ShockwatchTM -label is red, the package has been shocked during
transport.
Check that the crate and label are proper condition. In case of evident damage due to
transport, unpack the equipment in presence of an insurance company representative
and promptly claim any damage and inform the shipper for specifying the damage.
Check whether the package is actually addressed to the site and complete.
Figure 14 ShockwatchTM-label and TiltwatchTM-label
2.5.2 Rack mounted on a pallet
Unpack the rack according to the following instructions and in accordance with Figure
15.
– Cut the two straps (1).
–
Cut the protection foil along the cardboard corner reinforcement (2) and remove it. – Remove the cardboard reinforcement on the top and from the corners of the rack.
– Unscrew the four fixing claws from the feet of the rack.
– Retain the claws for later floor fixing of the rack.
– Shift the rack carefully from the transportation pallet. A second person is needed for
help and to prevent the fallover of the rack.
f WARNING!
Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps. Pay attention to the
tension of the straps. Use only plate shears.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 32/217
32 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
f WARNING!
Do not burn the package, as the burning packaging material may give off toxic gases.
The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).
Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.
Figure 15 Rack mounted on the pallet
Figure 16 Dismounting the rack from the pallet
2.5.3 Rack shipped in a crate
The racks are shipped vertically in wooden crates (or horizontally in case of transporta-
tion by airplane).The crate dimensions for the BS-240 / 240 II are
1800 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm (HxWxD). Depending on the pre-installed modules
inside the racks, the crate can weigh up to approx. 190 kg.
The crate dimensions for the BS-240XL / 240XL II are 2225 mm x 800 mm x 650 mm
(HxWxD).
The Service racks will be delivered without backup batteries (weight aspects).
Additional crates are used for transporting of the batteries.
2
1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 33/217
DN0932994 33
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
All crates have the following information printed on them for identification of delivery:
– Customer order number
– Serial number of rack or other supplied equipment
– Destination – Gross and net weight
– Overall dimensions (cm)
– Delivery papers
For transportation of the crates from the unloading area into the construction room use
handling aids (for example: fork-lift truck, goods elevator), a second person is needed
for help.
During the unpacking steps, great care must be taken to ensure that the rack is not
scratched or damaged in any way. Unpack the rack according to the following figures.
Figure 17 Removal of the straps, opening of the top cover
f WARNING!
Safety gloves and goggles must be worn when cutting the straps.
Pay attention to the tension of the straps. Use only plate shears
– Cut the three straps (see Figure 17) and remove the 10 M4 screws on the top of the
crate (see Figure 17).
– Remove the crates top cover.
– Take out the packing material protecting the rack (see Figure 18).
– Remove the protection to the head and to the base of the rack.
– Open and remove the tubular PE-wrap protecting the rack (see Figure 19).
– Take the rack out of the crate with the aid of the straps around the rack.
– Lift the rack in vertical position.
cut
unscrew
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 34/217
34 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 18 Removal of the packing material
Figure 19 Opening of the PE-wrap, lifting straps around the rack
Immediately after unpacking the rack, inspect it for damage and report the extent of any
damage to the transportation company.
f WARNING!
The burning of packing material should be avoided, because packaging may give off
toxic gases.
2.5.4 Unpacking of modules and batteries
Proceed the unpacking of modules as follows:
– Open the carton with a suitable knife along the adhesive tape at the top.
– Take the PVC foil bag that contain the module out of the carton.
– Open the PVC protection bag carefully with the knife and take out the module.
Avoid the handling of the modules in high-static environmental. The packing material
should be preserved for possible re-packing in future.
The battery sets of the Service1/2 racks will be shipped in wooden crates, including a
plastic bag that contain cable sets, screws,washers and the connection plates.
Further the parts of the air vent system and the installation instruction.
cut
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 35/217
DN0932994 35
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 20 Unpacking of the battery sets
– Cut the tension belts with a plate shear.
– Remove the top cover of the wooden crate. – Take the batteries out of the crate using the battery handles.
2.5.5 Rack installation
Prior starting the rack installation, consult the site documentation to locate the installa-
tion point of the Base Station, the PCM24/30 network termination, AC mains or power
supply unit (if -48Vdc will be provided from external equipment) and the entry of the
antenna cables into the construction room.
Further check the proper installation of the earthing bar and the necessary cable
runways.
If the rack must be moved to the final installation position by crane and for later connec-tion works, it is necessary to remove the top cover of the rack.
Proceed in case of BS-240, BS-240II, BS-240 XL and BS-240 XLII racks as follows:
– Open the rack-door and remove both screws in the upper part of the front of rack.
(see Figure 21).
– Lift up the top cover and slide it back.
– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.
f WARNING!
Before opening the rack-door take measures to prevent the rack from falling over!
Note the accident prevention regulations when working with a fork lift truck or crane!
Don‘t remove the crane eyes after the crane transport is finished to guarantee the later
EMI-closeness of the rack!
If the racks stand side by side, they must be screwed together to one common unit with
one nut and screw M8x20 (part of MK:EMCRV1 for rack type I or MK:EMCR-2V1 for
rack type II). For this purpose the top cover has to be removed as shown in the figure
Figure 21.
cut
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 36/217
36 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 21 Removal of top cover for crane eye access
For BS-240 II/ BS-240XL II rack type proceed as follows:
– Open the rack-door (see Figure 22): Slide down the top cover (1), push the button
behind the cover (2) and flap out the handle (3).
– Turn the handle counterclockwise 90° (4).
– Slide the top cover 20 mm in front direction and lift it up (see Figure 23).
– Disconnect the green/yellow ground wire from the pin inside the top cover.
g NOTE
If no Service1A rack is installed on site and the base station is powered by an external
-48VDC source, the green/yellow ground connection wire between the top cover and the
rack is not needed or provided.
Figure 22 Opening of rack door
remo ve the scr ew s
gro und wir e
1
2
3
4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 37/217
DN0932994 37
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 23 Removal of the top cover
Remove the top cover (MK:ROOF-2BV1) of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB in accor-
dance with the following figures:
• Open the rack door.
• Loosen both M10 nuts behind the door frame.
• Lift up the top cover and retain bolts and screws for later re-fixing of the top cover.
Figure 24 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (1)
Figure 25 Removal of the top cover BS-240 IIB / XL IIB (2)
g NOTE
The top cover is fixed to the rack at the front side only.
1
2
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 38/217
38 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 26 Guideline for crane transport
60°
BS-240 / 240XL
65°
BS-240 II / 240XL II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 39/217
DN0932994 39
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 27 Space necessary for installation of base station rack variants
1 6 0 0 m m
450 mm
2350 mm
1700 mm
min. dimensions for double rack solution
600 mm 4 5 0 m m
1900 mm
2 0 2 5 m m
BS-240XL
BS-240
minimum
room height
min. dimensions for 3-rack solution
Note:
BS-240 without earthquake kit close to wall
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 50 mm (without earthquake kit)BS-240 II / 240XL II with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K4119-X: 150 mm
BS-240 XL with earthquake kit Siemens serial no. S30861-K2131-X: 400 mm
* ) d i s t a n
c e
t o w a l l
BS-240XL: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)
7 5 0 m m
7 5 0 m m
2200 mm
4 5 0 m m
* ) d i s t a n c e
t o w a l l
**) the distance between two racks, side by side must not exceed 1mm
**) **)
**)
500 mm
BS-240 XL without earthquake mounting kit: 50 mm
*) Minimum clearance rear to wall for:
BS-240 II / 240XL II: 100 mm (without earthquake kit)
Minimum clearance by back-to-back assembly for:
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 40/217
40 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
f WARNING!
The total weight of rack must not exceed 360 kg (BS-240 / 240 II) or 425 kg
(BS-240XL / 240XL II) respectively when being lifted.For determination the weight refer to section “Technical Data”.
Under no circumstances must the sets of batteries be inserted into the Service Racks
during transportation on site. The doors must be kept closed during transportation.
g NOTE
To prevent the racks from tipping over (product safety) they must be fixed either to a wall
(exepted in earthquake zones) or the floor.
The minimum distance from the rear of the rack to the wall must be considered. It is rec-
ommended to prepare the fixings before moving the rack to its final position.
The four fastening claws, delivered with the rack, can be used for floor fixing of the racks.
Figure 28 Adjusting and fixing of the rack feet
Proceed as described in the list below:
– Check the correct vertical rack position, using the spirit level. If the position is incor-
rect, equalize the differences in the floor height by adjusting the rack feet (see Figure
28).
– Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the rack feet (2) for proper floor contact by using
the adjuster feet wrench.
– Push a claw (3) on each of the 4 rack feet and mark the drilling point on the floor.
– Remove the claws and drill the 4 holes and insert the 4 wall plugs (e.g. Fischer
S8GK) into the holes.
– Push the claws on the rack feet and fix them.
Alternatively the rack can be fastened to the wall. The rack has two right angle brackets
on its top rear for mounting to wall (Figure 29, right side). Depending from the rack type,
the necessary minimum distance must be considered from rear of the rack to the wall
(see Figure 27). An right dimensioned additional distance piece can be helpful therefor.
1 2
3
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 41/217
DN0932994 41
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 29 Floor and wall mounting of the racks
f WARNING!
In earthquake zones, the fastening to wall is prohibited. Use the earthquake mounting
kit for securing to the floor.
2.5.5.1 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240
For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2086-X) proceed in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 31.
– Drill the holes with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!
– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.
– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 18x80 M10 I) into the inserting tool (e.g. Fischer
FZE 18) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.
– Fit bolts M10 (1) with washer (2) through both holes of claw (3) and distance plate
(4). Drive the bolts into the steel plugs as fast as possible. Fix in this way all claws
for the rear side rack feeds first.
– Shift the racks to the correct position, so that each of the rear adjuster feet is placed
in the cutout of a claw.
– Push a claw on each of the front side feeds and fix them with bolts and washers. The
distance plates are not needed for the front side row.
Figure 30 Earthquake mounting kit
12
3
2 x for rearside of rack 2x for frontside of rack
4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 42/217
42 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 31 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)
2.5.5.2 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL
For setup the earthquake mounting kit (S30861-K2131-X) proceed in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes in accordance with Figure 32.
– Drill the holes with 22 mm in diameter and a depth of 90 mm. Don‘t pre-drill the
holes!
– Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
– Clean out the drilling holes by a vacuum.
– Put steel plug (e.g. Fischer FZA 22x100 M12I) into the inserting tool (e.g. FischerFZE 22) and hammer into each hole until the sleeve is flush with surface.
Figure 32 Drilling sketch for earthquake mounting kit (2 racks)
– Check the completeness of the mounting kit according to the following figure and
remove the rear panel of the rack.
0 5 0
4 8 5
5 3 5
6 0 0
6 5 0
1 0 8 5
1 1 3 5
0
463
32,5
Service1 Rack Base Rack
rear
front
rack length 600 mm
r a c k
d e p t h 4 5 0 m m
600 mm
423 mm 423 mm
3 3 5 m m
5 7 , 5 m m
88,5 mm
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 43/217
DN0932994 43
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 33 Parts of the earthquake mounting kit for the BS-240XL
– Remount the adjuster feet, setup the 4 metal angles (1) and fix them with Allan screw
(6) as shown in Figure 34.
Figure 34 Mounting of pos. 1
– Click spring nuts in the extrusions.
– Insert both stiffening parts (2).
– Move the stiffening parts to rear and lateral side to stop.
1
2 2
3 3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5 6
1
1
6
6
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 44/217
44 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 35 Mounting of stiffening parts (1)
– Slide in the filler plates (3).
– Fix each stiffening part with 12 Allan screws M6 (4).
Figure 36 Mounting of stiffening parts (2)
– Fasten the rack to the steel plugs in the floor with 4 bolts M12 (5).
– Remove the 4 Allan screws (6). It is absolute necessary, that the edge pieces can
work free of strain in the case of earthquake.
– Mount again the rear panel.
g NOTE
The use of the earthquake mounting kit for BS-240XL requires a minimum clearance to
the wall of 400 mm.
g NOTE
For mounting the earthquake mounting kit in a service rack, first the battery tray has to
be remounted.applying to your system.
.
f WARNING!
Take measures to prevent the rack falling over during the removal of the adjuster feet
and mounting of the metal angles. A second person is needed for help! The rack door
stay must be locked in the open position using the door stay provided, whilst work is
being performed inside the rack.
6
6
2
34
extrusion
3
63
4
5
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 45/217
DN0932994 45
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
2.5.6 Setup of earthquake mounting kit for BS-240 II (B) / 240XL II (B)
In areas with the possibility of earthquake use the mounting kit for Earthquake Zone 4
Rack (MK:EQ4RV2, S30861-K4119-X). The additional brackets improve the robustness
of the rack against earthquake shocks.
The mounting kit consists of the mechanical parts as shown in the figure below.
Figure 37 Parts of the earthquake kit S3086-K4119-X
2
3 3
1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 46/217
46 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Fix the rack to the floor in accordance with Figure 40 in steps as follows:
– Mark the positions of the drilling holes onto the floor.
– Drill holes at the marked points with 18 mm in diameter and a depth of 98 mm. Don‘t
pre-drill the holes! – Produce an undercut of the drilling holes: drill the hole to stop and swivel the jack
hammer 3-5 times keeping stop to concrete.
– Clean out the drilling holes with a vacuum cleaner.
– Put dowels (3) (e.g. HILTI - M12*73 / 20) into the drilling holes and hammer them
until the sleeve is flush with surface (use an inserting tool, if available).
– Place the double claw (1) at its mounting position and fix it with the provided bolts at
the rear dowels (see Figure 38).
– Tighten the bolts to a torque of 60 Nm.
– Shift the rack to the appropriate position, so that each of the rear rack feet is placed
in a cut-out of the double claw (Figure 38).
– Open the rack door. – Insert a claw (2) on each of the front feet and affix them with the M12 bolts to the
dowels in front of the rack (see Figure 39).
– Tighten the connection to a torque of 60 Nm.
Figure 38 Double claw for the rear feet in mounted position
3
3
1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 47/217
DN0932994 47
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 39 Claws for the front feet before mounting
Figure 40 Drilling sketch for the earthquake mounting kit
2 2
(sketch without scale, all measures in mm)
4 6 5
1 4 2 . 5
4 5 0
57.5
485
600
wall
front side
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 48/217
48 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
2.5.7 Back-to-back assembly
Back-to-back assembly means all configurations that are not lined up in a connected
row, but with distance between the sidewalls of racks. These configuration are accord-
ing to customer requirements.
The open cable channel for inter-rack cabling from one rack to the other one has to be
closed with an EMI shielded mechanical EMI-kit. In this conduit, the DC-cables, battery
cables and the temp.resistor cables will be routed from one rack to the other.
An U-profile bar above the conduit will be used for routing of the Selic-bus-cables and
CAN-bus-cable. The mechanical equipment and cables necessary for connecting the
racks are part of corresponding mounting kits.
g NOTE
Other configurations with up to 5 m distance are possible and have to be defined for
specific project. In this case additional mechanical support and sleeve equipment as
well as extended cables, described in the following tables, are necessary.
Figure 41 Back-to-back configuration
1 6 0 0 m m
2500 mm
conduitS30861-S2146-S
*)100 mm
*) Minimum clearance for BS-240 II / 240 XL II / 240 XL
750 mm
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 49/217
DN0932994 49
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Figure 42 Side-by-side configuration
Figure 43 Back-to-back configuration with Extension1 and Extension2
max. 5 m
conduitS30861-S2146-S
4 5 0 m m
7 5 0 m m
profile bar
(Z- clearance of rear to wall, depend on rack type)
Z
conduitS30861-S2146-S
2 4 0 0 m m + 2 x Z
1 5 0 0 m m
Service1 Base Extension1
Extension2
profile bar
(Z - clearance of rear to wall,depend on rack type)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 50/217
50 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Figure 44 Back-to-back configuration with Service1 and Service2
Detailed information about the wall distances (Z) of the different Rack types is described
in the chapter 2.5.5 / Figure 27.
Additional to the standard configurations of back-to-back assembly as shown in the
figures of this section other configuration with distances up to 5 metres are possible.
In this case required components and extended cables have to be defined in accor-
dance to customers requirements depending on length of flexible conduit.
The following tables informs about the mechanical components and typical cables for
extension.Measure “X” is the length of the flexible conduit and means also the additional
cable length.
The relation between cables with Siemens code no. and cable no. is given in Table 9.
conduit 2 4 0 0 m m +
2 x Z
1 5 0 0 m m
Service1 Base Extension1
Service2
profile bar
S30861-S2147-S
( Z - c l e a r a n c e o f r e a r t o w a l l , d e p e n d o n r a c k
t y p e )
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 51/217
DN0932994 51
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Service
2/3
Service
2/2
distance
“X”
Service
2/1
Service
1
Base Extension
1
Extension
2S2/1-S2/2 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3 E2-S2/2
DC cable Rack (33)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X
Battery cable Rack (110/3,
111/3)+X
(110/4,
111/4)+X
Temp.resitor
cable
Rack 1)
(112/3)
1)
(112/4)
conduit Rack 2)
1) max. distance of AC/DC frame 2,5 m otherwise use up to 5 m cable 112/4
2) type of flexible conduit see Tab.”Types of flexible conduit”
Table 4 Gap between Service2/1 and Service2/2 rack
Service
2/3
Service
2/2
Service
2/1
Service
1
Base Extension
1
distance
“X”
Extension
2
S2/2-E2 S2/1-E2 S1-E2 B-E2 E1-E2
DC cable Rack 1)
(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (248)+X
Selic cable Rack 1)
(277,
278)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) replace fix installed cable by extended cable (+X)
2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Table 5 Gap between Extension1and Extension2 rack
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 52/217
52 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
Service
2/2
Service
2/1
Service
1
Base distance
X
Exten-
sion1
Exten-
sion2
S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-E1 S1-E2 B-E1 B-E2
DC cable Rack 1)
(35)+X
1)
(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (246)+X
Battery cable Rack 1)
(277,278
)+X
1)
(277,278
)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)
2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Table 6 Gap between Base and Extension1 rack
Service
2/3
Service
2/2
Service
2/1
distance
X
Service
1
Base Exten-
sion
1
Exten-
sion
2
S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-S2/1 S1-S2/2 S1-S2/3
DC cable Rack 3)
(33)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X
Battery cable Rack (110/2+
111/2)+X
(110/3+
111/3)+X
(110/4+
111/4)+X
Temp.resistor cable Rack 1)
(112/2)
2)
(112/3)
2)
(112/3)
conduit Rack 4)
1) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 2,5 m, otherwise use cable 112/3
2) max. distance from AC/DC frame to battery 5,5 m, otherwise a special must be defined
3) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)
4) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Table 7 Gap between Service2/1 and Service1 rack
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 53/217
DN0932994 53
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Base station installation
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
The following cables with Siemens code no. are typical cables for interrack-cabling
without extension.
The cables 33-36 are fix installed in the Service1 rack and have to be replaced by
extended according to back-to-back configuration. The installation requires the tempo-
rary removal of the plate, located at the top of EMI-panel.
Service
2/3
Service
2/2
Service
2/1
Service
1
distance
X
Base Exten-
sion
1
Exten-
sion
2S2/2-E1 S2/2-E2 S2/1-E1 S2/1-E2 S1-B S1-E1 S1-E2
DC cable Rack 1)
(34)+X
1)
(35)+X
1)
(36)+X
CAN-Bus cable Rack (249)+X (247)+X (248)+X (245)+X (246)+X
conduit Rack 2)
1) Replace fix installed cables by extended cables (+X)
2) type of flexible conduit see Tab. ”Types of flexible conduit”
Table 8 Gap between Service1 and Base
cable code no. Siemens code no.
110/2, 111/2 S30864-X211-A47
110/3, 111/3 S30864-X211-A48
110/4, 111/4 S30864-X211-A49
112/2 S30864-X211-A44
112/3 S30864-X211-A45
33 Component of S30864-X211-A29
34 Component of S30864-X211-A29
35 Component of S30864-X211-A29
36 Component of S30864-X211-A29
245 S30864-X210-A11
246 S30864-X210-A12
247 S30864-X210-A13
248 S30864-X210-A14
249 S30864-X210-A15
277 S30864-X210-A2
278 S30864-X210-A2
Table 9 Interrack-cables without extension
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 54/217
54 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805806f3dbf
Confidential
Base station installation
g NOTE
Each added rack requires a separate ground connection to the nearest grounding bar
on site!
flexible conduit Siemens code no.
type 1 (distance 0,625 m - 2,40 m) C50324-Z200-C22
type 2 (distance 1,25 m - 5,00 m) C50324-Z200-C21
Table 10 Types of flexible conduit
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 55/217
DN0932994 55
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3 External cabling activities
3.1 OverviewThis chapter provides the information required for installing the external cables between
the Base Station and the infrastructure equipment on site.
The rack cannot function without thefollowing cable connections:
– In case of AC power supply: AC mains terminal block 5 pole - power distribution
panel of 230 Vac, 3-phase supply
– By using of DC power supply: DC mains terminal block 2 pole - power distribution
panel of -48Vdc
– Ground bolts -> ground bar
– Abis interface -> NTPM (in case of transmission via terrestrial lines)
–
Abis interface -> Microwave indoor units (if µW equipment is used for transmission) – Microwave indoor units -> Microwave antennas
– Transmit / receive antenna connectors - antenna system
– Ground strip of antenna cable shields - ground bar
optional:
– Serial interface - signalling link terminal
– Alarm collection terminal - external alarm sensors
All interfaces excepted the antenna connectors are located at the EMI panel below the
top rack cover.
For cable installation the top cover has to be removed. For lift-up remove the bolts in the
top extrusions.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 56/217
56 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 45 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Base rack
Figure 46 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 Extension rack
ACTM
LPAMSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 VExt.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...4
Serial IF
ground bolts
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CU 0...3
CU 4...7CAN IN
ground bolts
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 57/217
DN0932994 57
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 47 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service1 rack
Figure 48 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240/240XL Service2 rack
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
ground bolts
LPA
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
ground bolts
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 58/217
58 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 49 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Base rack
Figure 50 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL Extension rack
ACTM
LPAMSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 VExt.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3Serial IF
ground bolts
LPA
MSU
PE-Plate
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CU 4...7
CU 8...11CAN IN
CU 0...3
ground bolts
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 59/217
DN0932994 59
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 51 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Base rack
Figure 52 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II Extension rack
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
LPA
MSUPE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
CAN IN
CU 0...3
CU 4...7
ground bolts
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 60/217
60 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 53 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II/240XL II Service1 rack
Figure 54 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240 II /240XL II Service2 rack
LPA
MSU
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
ground bolts
CAN IN
LPA
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
ground bolts
CAN IN
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 61/217
DN0932994 61
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 55 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Base rack
Figure 56 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL II Extension rack
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
LPA
MSU
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
CU 8...11
CU 0...3
CU 4...7
ground bolts
CAN IN
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 62/217
62 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 57 Interfaces on the top of the BS-240XL IIB Base rack
Some additional hints for the installation of external cabling:
– The first cable that has to be installed is the ground cable between the main groundbolt on top of the rack and the nearest ground bar on site.
– The second installation step is to connect the ground bolts of the different racks in
series.
– After that all other cables e.g. AC mains, RF cabling or alarm wires can be installed.
– The screen of the RF jumpers has to be grounded before entering the BTSE via the
cable feeding module, see Figure 102.
– If cables are fed through coaxial cable access located at the top of the rack at the
front, the screen has to be grounded like all other coaxial cables.
The following figure shows the location of the external interfaces of the BS-240/240XL
(example of BS-240 with Service1-, Base- and Extension rack).
CU 8...15
CU 16...23 Red
CU 8...15 Red
CU 16...23
CAN-IN
CAN-OUTSerial-IF
PCM 0 PCM 1
ACTM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 63/217
DN0932994 63
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 58 Locations of the connectors for external cables
LMT
ETHERNET
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O #
0
M U C O
# 1
C O B A
0
C O S A
0
C O B A
1
C O S A
1
LMT
ETHERNET
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
ACOM#0
ACOM#1
ACOM#2
ACOM#3
CU#0
CU#1
CU#2
CU#3
CU#4
CU#5
CU#6
CU#7 M
U C O #
0
M U C O
# 1
Base rack Extension rackService1 rack
LMT
ETHERNET
DC-PANEL
ACT-C
SIEMENS
LE 0LE 1LE 2LE 3
LE 4
LE 5
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC
AC/
DC#0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5
AC + DC Distribution
3 x 230 Vac **
antenna cables
serial interface cable
Abis lines (OVPT PCM0, PCM1)
external alarms / commands
ground cable
microwave
-48 Vdc*
*) only used if an external DC-power supply is available
CTRL#0
**) if an external 3 x 230 V ac power supply source will be used
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 64/217
64 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.2 Ground and AC- power supply connections
The racks have to be connected to the site specific ground system before starting the
connection of AC mains cable.
An external ground wire (16 mm2, copper conductor) has to be connected on the upper
left side grounding bolt of the rack which must be attached to the ground bar on site. All
adjoining racks will be grounded using a prefabricated wire bridge and is connected to
top left and right corners of each rack respectively.
If on site a main ground wire (50 mm2, copper conductor) is installed, it is possible to
connect each rack on the shortest way to the main ground using 16 mm2 copper wires.
Connect the racks to the ground system as follows:
– Use the nearest ground bar on site.
– Measure the distances between the connection points of the ground system and the
ground bolt of the rack.
– Cut the cables to the required length. – Remove the cable covering at the end to connect to the ground bolt (length approx.
15 mm) and mount the cable lug M8.
– Connect the prepared cable end to the ground bolt.
– Firmly tighten the nut.
Figure 59 Ground and AC mains connections (example)
f WARNING!
Note, that the connection by screws at the top of racks standing side by side are
mechanical connections only. These connections are not ground connections!
3 x 230 Vac mains
AC distribution
AC counter3 x 25 A main breakers2)
connection to ground
H07-RN F 5 G41)
ground wire bridges
alternative solution for rack grounding 50 mm2 main ground wire
16 mm 2ground wires
1) cross section needed depend on the cable length between
3 x 32 A main breakers3)
external breaker and MSU2) BS-241, BS-240, BS-240XL3) BS-241 II, BS-240 II, BS-240XL II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 65/217
DN0932994 65
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
The figure above shows the recommended cabling for the power supply and ground
connections. The recommended cable types guarantees the proper function of the base
stations, equipped with up to 24 carriers.
An easily accessible disconnect device is incorporated into the AC mains supply wiring.To isolate the mains supply, a circuit breaker has to be fitted in each phase inside the
AC distribution box close to the base station (see Figure 59). The disconnect devices
shall simultaneously interrupt all phase conductors.
A 5-pole terminal block of the MSU, located in the top of Service1 / Service1A rack, is
the connection point for the AC mains cable.
The base station will be powered by 3 x 230 V, 50 Hz, 20 A per phase.
Figure 60 Wiring example of the 230 Vac terminal block (BS-240 Service1 rack)
This warning must appear in the original German text:
f WARNING!
Vor Anschluß des 3 x 230 V Einspeisungskabels ist sicherzustellen, daß das Kabel
spannungsfrei ist. Die Hauptsicherungen sind zu unterbrechen. Es sind geeignete Maß-
nahmen gegen unbefugtes Einschalten der Netzspannung zu treffen.
f WARNING!
AC supplied BTS versions, remotely disconnected from power supply: Service person-
nel must make sure that the external AC circuit breakers (disconnect device) of the
relevant Base Station - which is remotely disconnected from external power - are
switched off before beginning with any Service&Maintenance activities. This is to deen-
ergize the system reliably (electrical shock hazards)
An imprint, located on the front panel of the AC frame gives instruction how to deener-
gize the base station:
To deenergize entire unit:
PE L1L2L3 N
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 66/217
66 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
1. “Switch OFF the battery breaker BR33 at the AD-panel of the Service1 to deener-
gize DC circuit”
2. “Switch OFF the AC breakers BR21, BR22, BR23 to deenergize AC circuit”
To connect the BS240/240XL with the AC mains connection point perform the followingsteps:
– Remove the bolts in the top extrusions to loosen the roof.
– Lift-up the roof sections carefully, to avoid damages of the paint coat.
– Refer to the site documentation for information about type and location of the AC dis-
tribution.
– Measure the distance between terminal block of the MSU and AC distribution.
– Cut the cable to the required length.
– Make sure that the protection earth wire (PE) is approx. 2 cm longer as the phase
conductors and the N-wire.
– Remove the insulation of the cable and cut back the wire insulation at the end, that
is to be connected to the terminal block.
– Fix the cable at the strain relief with cable ties.
– Insert the wires into the terminals. Use a screwdriver for opening the terminal
springs. Check that all wires are in fixed position.
3.3 Ground and DC- power supply connections
For connecting the base station with an external -48 Vdc power supply unit a
Service1/Sevice1A Rack is not needed.
Depending on the site-specific power supply configuration, the racks have to be con-
nected directly with the power supply unit or via a power distribution panel.The following figure shows the power supply configuration for the BTS, including a
power distribution panel.
The power supply unit, as shown in Figure 61, is intended to be supplied by a -48 Vdc
centralized battery source. The charging rectifiers must be internally insulated from the
AC mains by insulating transformers.
The positive pole of the backup batteries has to be connected to ground.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 67/217
DN0932994 67
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 61 Ground- and power supply connections with -48V DC
g NOTE
In case of a DC supplied BS-240 II Base and Extension rack, an external DC circuit
breaker with a (recommended) minimum rating of 80 A has to be fitted per rack (see
figure above). The maximum rating is 100 A if an OEM external power supply rack
requires it.
UE -48 V DC +-
main breaker
power supplyunit
50 A
50 mm2
ground bar
DC main wires
H 07 V-R 16 mm 2
(yellow/green)
ground wire
H 07 V-R 35 mm2
2 x H 07 V-R 16 mm2
backupbatteries
battery +0 V poleconnected to ground
DC supply +0 V poleconnected to ground
optionalpower distributionpanel
main ground wire 50 mm2alternative solution for rack grounding
groundwires
2
2 x H 07 V-R 35 mm*)**)***)
80 A
fuse per rack:
**)*)
*) BS-240 / Service2
**) BS-240XL / BS-240 II
***) BS-240XL II
100 A ***)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 68/217
68 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Installation of the DC wires is as follows:
– Measure the distance between rack and the power supply unit or power distribution
panel.
– Cut the wires to the required length.
– Remove the cable insulation (length approx. 12 mm) at the ends to be connected to
the terminal block of the MSU (the location is shown in Figure 62).
– Insert the prepared ends into the terminal block.
– Pay attention to the correct polarity of the connection from BTS to the DC output of
the power supply unit.
Figure 62 Terminal block for -48 V DC input of MSU (BS-240)
For installation of the ground connection proceed as described in section 3.2 of this
manual.
-48 V + 0 V
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 69/217
DN0932994 69
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.4 Abis-interface - PCM link terminal
The Abis interfaces PCM0 and PCM1, located on the EMI panel, provides the commu-
nication links to the neighboring Base Stations or to the controlling BSC.
The Abis interfaces can be terminated with an ABISCON (without Overvoltage Protec-
tion for indoor applications) or with an optional Overvoltage Protections (OVPT) which
protects the boards inside the rack against overvoltage (residual voltage < 1 kV).
Two types of ABISCON/OVPT exist:
– ABISCON/OVPT for 120 Ω cables (balanced)
– ABISCONCX/OVPTCOAX for 75 Ω cables (coaxial)
g NOTE
If the connection point for the Abis line (e.g., NTPM or microwave equipment) is outside
the building where the BTSE is installed, an OVPT module has to be installed always.
Depending on the different cable impedances it is recommended to use:
– Screened cable containing shielded twisted pairs for 100/120 Ω PCM lines
• 09YS(ST)CY 8x2x0.6/1.2
• 09YS(ST)CY 16x2x0.6/1.2-120 GR FRNC
– Coaxial cables for 75 Ω wiring, e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
g NOTE
Use only twisted pair or coaxial copper cables with braided shielding!
If cables should be used without shielded twisted pairs, do not route up-link and down-
link PCM lines in one common cable.
The maximum cable length depends on the attenuation of the cable, in order to fulf ill therequirements of minimum voltage levels to be provided at Abis interface according to
PCM standards.
The cable shielding must be connected to the relevant ground pins as close as possible
(in order to avoid EMC/RF interfering effects).
3.4.1 Abis-Interface for 120 Ohm cable impedance
Before starting the connection of the PCM cables at the Abis interface of the OVPT or
the ABISCON, prepare the cables as shown in the figure below.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 70/217
70 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 63 Preparation of a PCM-cable, 120 Ω impedance
– Cut the cable to the required length (1).
– Cut back the outer insulation approx.13 cm (2).
– Remove approx. 11 cm of the braided shield (3).
– Cut around the outer insulation and shift the insulation ring to the end of the braided
shield (4).Remove the foil shields and the additional plastic wires.
– Remove 6 mm of the wires insulation.
– Wrap the exposed cable screen, that will be attached at the stress relieving bracket.
gNOTE
If screen-clamps should be used, the outer diameter of the PCM cable must not exceed
8 mm. The terminal block of the OVPT/ABISCON allows the connection of wires with a
cross-section range between 0.08 mm2 and 2,5 mm2 (#28 - #12 AWG).
Figure 64 Fastening of PCM cables at OVPT / ABISCON (120 Ω)
– Fix the cable at the stress-relieving by straps or screw down the screen clamps.
– Insert the wires into the terminals of the OVPT / ABISCON.
– Insert the additional wire (shielding potential) into one of the ground terminals (e.g.no. 24).
1 543
2
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 71/217
DN0932994 71
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
– Lead the additional wire and the uplink and downlink wires on the shortest route (that
means without sleeves) between the stress relieving and the screw terminals.
– All unconnected PCM lines (4 wires per line) must be connected to one of the ground
terminals.
g NOTE
The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 connectors and monitoring inter-
face connectors.
Please make sure that the wires and cables at these connectors are not under mechan-
ical tension - use suitable stress relief measures!
The pin assignments of the ABISCON is equal to the pin assignments of the OVPT and
shown in the following figures.
Figure 65 Abis interface PCM0 pin assignment, 120 Ω)
Figure 66 Abis interface PCM1 pin assignment, 120 Ω)
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A B A B A AB
B A B A B A AB
PCM 4 PCM 3 PCM 2 PCM 1
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
E X T S Y N C
B
E X T S Y N C
A
1 3
2 4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
B A B A B A AB
B A B A B A AB
PCM 8 PCM 7 PCM 6 PCM 5
Down Link = RX
Up Link = TX
25
26
27
28
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 72/217
72 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.4.2 Abis-interface with ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX 75 Ohm
The Abis interface to the peripheral link equipment is done by use of 9 1,0/2,3 coaxial
connectors, located at the ABISCONCX or at the OVPTCOAX (shown in Figure 67).
Figure 67 OVPTCOAX with 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors, 75 Ω)
For Abis cabling with 75 Ω impedance use coaxial cable e.g. 2YCCY 0.4/2.5.
The coaxial cables will be prepared as follows:
– Fix a 1,0/2,3-female connector for each PCM-up and down line at the end to be con-
nected to the ABISCONCX / OVPTCOAX.
– Connect the prepared cable to the matching connectors.
– Use a torque spanner for 1,0/2,3 connector (35 Ncm).
– Fix the cables at the holes for stress-relieving with cable ties.
g NOTE
The ABISCON / OVPT boards have delicate 1,0/2,3 coaxial connectors. Make sure thatthe wires and cables at these connectors are not fixed under mechanical tension - use
suitable stress relief measures!
holes for stress relieving
PCM lineconnectors
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 73/217
DN0932994 73
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
signal coax connector signal coax connector
PCM1-ULA 1 PCM3-DLA 6
PCM1-DLA 2 PCM4-ULA 7
PCM2-ULA 3 PCM4-DLA 8
PCM2-DLA 4 EXTSYNCA 9
PCM3-ULA 5 --- ---
Table 11 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM0, 75 Ω
signal coax connector signal coax connector
PCM5-ULA 1 PCM7-DLA 6
PCM5-DLA 2 PCM8-ULA 7
PCM6-ULA 3 PCM8-DLA 8
PCM6-DLA 4 --- 9
PCM7-ULA 5 --- ---
Table 12 Pin assignments of Abis interface PCM1, 75 Ω
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 74/217
74 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.4.3 Abis-interface without ABISCON / OVPT / ETHCON
Without the ABISCON / OVPT or ETHCON, if these function is not needed, a SUB-D25
female connector is the direct interface for the PCM links.
g NOTE
Without OVPT no monitoring possibility is provided.
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 1 - ULA PCM Line 1 Up Link A
14 PCM 1 - ULB PCM Line 1 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 1 - DLA PCM Line 1 Down Link A
15 PCM 1 - DLB PCM Line 1 Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 2 - ULA PCM Line 2 Up Link A
16 PCM 2 - ULB PCM Line 2 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 2 - DLA PCM Line 2 Down Link A
17 PCM 2 - DLB PCM Line 2 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 3 - ULA PCM Line 3 Up Link A
19 PCM 3 - ULB PCM Line 3 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 3 - DLA PCM Line 3 Down Link A
20 PCM 3 - DLB PCM Line 3 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 6
9 PCM 4 - ULA PCM Line 4 Up Link A
21 PCM 4 - ULB PCM Line 4 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 710 PCM 4 - DLA PCM Line 4 Down Link A
22 PCM 4 - DLB PCM Line 4 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 EXTSYNCA
24 EXTSYNCB
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Table 13 Pin assignments of the PCM0 interface (SubD 25 connector)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 75/217
DN0932994 75
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Pin no. SubD 25 Signal name Function
1 PCM 5 - ULA PCM Line 5 Up Link A
14 PCM 5- ULB PCM Line 5 Up Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 1
2 PCM 5 - DLA PCM Line 5 Down Link A
15 PCM 5 - DLB PCM Line 5Down Link B
3 GND/G shield pair 2
4 PCM 6 - ULA PCM Line 6 Up Link A
16 PCM 6 - ULB PCM Line 6 Up Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 3
5 PCM 6 - DLA PCM Line 6 Down Link A
17 PCM 6 - DLB PCM Line 6 Down Link B
18 GND/G shield pair 4
6 PCM 7 - ULA PCM Line 7 Up Link A
19 PCM 7 - ULB PCM Line 7 Up Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 5
7 PCM 7 - DLA PCM Line 7 Down Link A
20 PCM 7 - DLB PCM Line 7 Down Link B
8 GND/G shield pair 69 PCM 8 - ULA PCM Line 8 Up Link A
21 PCM 8 - ULB PCM Line 8 Up Link B
11 GND/G shield pair 7
10 PCM 8 - DLA PCM Line 8 Down Link A
22 PCM 8 - DLB PCM Line 8 Down Link B
23 GND/G shield pair 8
12 ---
24 ---
25 GND/G
13 GND/G main cable shield
Table 14 Pin assignments of the PCM1 interface (SubD 25 connector)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 76/217
76 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.4.4 Monitoring interfaces of ABISCON and OVPT
The ABISCON / OVPT provides 3 6pin DIN41616 test connectors for monitoring the
PCM lines.
Figure 68 Monitoring interfaces for PCM lines of ABISCON / OVPT
The following tables show the pin assignment for the monitoring interfaces. The pin
arrangement is shown in figure below.
12
34
56
12
34
56
12
34
56
connector 3
connector 2
connector 1
connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name
1- 1 PCM 1 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 3 - ULB
1- 2 PCM 1 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 3 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 1 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 3 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 1 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 4 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 2 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 4 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 2 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 4- DLA
2- 1 PCM 2 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 4- DLB
2- 2 PCM 2 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 3 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB
Table 15 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM0
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 77/217
DN0932994 77
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.4.5 Abis-interface with ETHCON
The ETHCON module allows the connection of Abis lines with copper wires via two Fast
Ethernet interfaces (FE0, FE1) and optical cables via the two optical interfaces (SFP2,
SFP3). The ETHCON is always fitted at the SubD25 plug-in position “PCM 0” as this
connector is the interface to the core module CESCOBA. The ETHCON can only imple-
mented in conjunction with this type of core module.
The following figure gives information of the connector arrangement of the ETHCON
module.
connector / pin Signal name connector / pin Signal name
1- 1 PCM 5 - ULA 2- 4 PCM 7 - ULB
1- 2 PCM 5 - ULB 2- 5 PCM 7 - DLA
1- 3 PCM 5 - DLA 2- 6 PCM 7 - DLB
1- 4 PCM 5 - DLB 3- 1 PCM 8 - ULA
1- 5 PCM 6 - ULA 3- 2 PCM 8 - ULB
1- 6 PCM 6 - ULB 3- 3 PCM 8 - DLA
2- 1 PCM 6 - DLA 3- 4 PCM 8 - DLB
2- 2 PCM 6 - DLB 3- 5 EXTSYNCA
2- 3 PCM 7 - ULA 3- 6 EXTSYNCB
Table 16 Pin assignments of the monitoring interfaces PCM1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 78/217
78 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 69 Connector arrangement of the ETHCON module
A 8-wire / twisted pair copper cable with a nominal impedance of 100 Ohms per pair has
to be used. The cable requires a 8P8C RJ45 plug at the end to be connected to the FE0
/ FE1 interface. A common outer cable screen is mandatory (cable type S/FTP- or
S/UTP).
The interfaces FE0 and FE1 are implemented so a 2nd BTS can be connected in a kind
of physical multidrop configuration.
For optical connections, duplex-fiber-optic cables with multimode fiber type according to
ISO/IEC9314-3 and LC-duplex plug according to IEC61754-20 have to be used.
g NOTE
Pay attention to the minimum bending radius of the optical cables. Fix the cables at
stress relieving facilitys with cable ties.
To allow the connection of fiber-optic cables, SFP-modules have to be inserted into the
cage of ports SFP2 & SFP3. The required SFP-module type has the part-number
V50017-U364-K500.
MonA
MonB
EXT_CLK SYN_C
EXT_CLK SYN_B
EXT_CLK SYN_A
GND
FE 0 FE1
SFP 2
SFP 3
stress relieving clip
ETHCON TRACE
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 79/217
DN0932994 79
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 70 ETHCON module, connected via FE0 and FE1
The ETHCON module provides the possibility to connect external balanced or unbal-
anced clock signals to its spring terminal block. Therefore, twisted pair or coaxial copper
cables can be used.
The cables have to be fixed at the stress relieving clip of the ETHCON module‘s cover
part.
The terminal arrangement of the external clock interface EXTCLOCK is given in the fol-
lowing table.
signal terminal
no.
terminal
no.
signal
GND 2 1 Monitoring EXTSYNC A
EXT_CLK_SYNC_A 4 3 Monitoring EXTSYNC B
EXT_CLK_SYNC_B 6 5 EXT_CLK_SYNC_C
Table 17 Terminal arrangement for external clock connection
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 80/217
80 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 71 ETHCON, external clock connection
The trace connector of the ETHCON allows the monitoring of ethernet traffic. Therefore,
a 2x6 pin, 1.27mm grid connector is provided.
An adapter called "ETHCON TRACE" (part-number S30861-U2530), that includes
ethernet magnetics and RJ45 connectors has to be attached to the trace connector. The
pinning of the RJ45 sockets is as shown in the following table.
signal pin pin signal
Logical Port 5 RXN A1 B1 Logical Port 5 RXP
Logical Port 5 TXP A2 B2 Logical Port 5 RX center
Logical Port 5 TX center A3 B3 Logical Port 5 TXN
Logical Port 4 TXN A4 B4 Logical Port 4 TXP
Logical Port 4 RXP A5 B5 Logical Port 4 TX center
Logical Port 4 RX center A6 B6 Logical Port 4 RXN
Table 18 ETHCON trace adapter ports, pin arrangement
terminal no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
wire bridge 0.8 mm
twisted pair cable
outer cable shield
terminal no.
1
2
3
4
5
6
wire bridge 0.8 mm
coaxial cable
outer cable shield
spring terminal block
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 81/217
DN0932994 81
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 72 ETHCON trace adapter
Port 4 Port 5
lug for temporary fixing
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 82/217
82 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.5 Connection of external alarm sensors
3.5.1 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM
The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection
Terminal for Base rack (ACTM).
The ACTM provides 8 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 48
external alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-
section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).
The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X10, the terminal blocks X1...X8 are used for
connection of external alarm sensors. At the terminal blocks X9 and X10 can be con-
nected up to 8 different electrical consumers (e.g. relays). All cables will be attached to
the stress relieving bracket as shown in the figure below.
The following tables give information on the wiring of the terminals.
g NOTE
For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.
Remove the outer insulation as shown in Figure 63 for proper ground contact of the
cable screen to the stress relieving bracket.
Figure 73 ACTM terminal numbering
Pin no. Signal nameX1
Signal nameX2
Signal nameX3
Signal nameX4
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL42P AL36P AL30P AL24P
3 AL43P AL37P AL31P AL25P
5 AL44P AL38P AL32P AL26P
7 AL45P AL39P AL33P AL27P
9 AL46P AL40P AL34P AL28P
Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 83/217
DN0932994 83
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
g NOTE
The signal source of the command outputs on the X1...X8 clamping blocks must be a
switching contact. The resistance of the contacts in closed position must be lower than
100 Ohm.
It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs.
The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of
the MK:OPEXAL which protects the ACTM against over-voltage.
The ACTM provides at the connectors X9 and X10 the possibility to connect up to 8 relay
contacts (e.g. relays with default contact open).
g NOTE
The switched current must not exceed 100 mA AC/DC (contact closed) and the maximumswitched voltage is limited to 150 V AC or 125 VDC (contact open).
The maximum switching power is 10 W.
11 AL47P AL41P AL35P AL29P
Pin no. Signal name
X5
Signal name
X6
Signal name
X7
Signal name
X8
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL0P AL6P AL12P AL18P
3 AL1P AL7P AL13P AL19P
5 AL2P AL8P AL14P AL20P
7 AL3P AL9P AL15P AL21P
9 AL4P AL10P AL16P AL22P
11 AL5P AL11P AL17P AL23P
Table 20 Pin assignments ACTM connector X5...X8
Pin no. Signal name
X1
Signal name
X2
Signal name
X3
Signal name
X4
Table 19 Pin assignments ACTM connector X1...X4 (Cont.)
Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name
1 CMD4_P 1 CMD0_P
2 CMD4_M 2 CMD0_M
3 CMD5_P 3 CMD1_P
4 CMD5_M 4 CMD1_M
Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 84/217
84 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.5.2 Connection of external alarm sensors at ACTM24
The access for cabling from external alarm sensors on site is the Alarm Collection
Terminal for Base rack ACTM24.
The ACTM24 provides 4 spring terminal blocks with 12 pins each for connecting of 24
external alarm sensors. Each terminal block allows the connection of wires with a cross-section in the range between 0,08 mm2 and 0,5 mm2 (#28 - #20 AWG).
The spring terminals are labelled X1 ... X4. All cables will be fixed to the copper bracket
of the module for strain relief and grounding of the cable screen with cable ties.
Figure 74 Terminal numbering of the ACTM24
The following table gives information on the pin aasignment of the terminals.
g
NOTE
For connection of external alarm sensors use cables with braided shield only.
Remove the outer insulation for proper ground contact of the cable screen to the stress
relieving bracket.
5 CMD6_P 5 CMD2_P
6 CMD6_M 6 CMD2_M
7 CMD7_P 7 CMD3_P
8 CMD7_M 8 CMD3_M
Pin no. X9 Signal name Pin no. X10 Signal name
Table 21 Pin assignments ACTM connector X9, X10 (Cont.)
Pin no. Signal name
X1
Signal name
X2
Signal name
X3
Signal name
X4
2, 4, 6, 8,10, 12 GND GND GND GND
1 AL18P AL12P AL6P AL0P
Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 85/217
DN0932994 85
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
g NOTE
It is not allowed to connect a voltage source to the alarm inputs. The alarm source hasto be a open/close contact like a relais contact or switch.
The connection of alarm sensors located outside the building requires the installation of
the MK:OPEXAL, that protects the ACTM24 against over-voltage.
g NOTE
The switched current must not exceed 100 mA AC/DC (contact closed) and the maximum
switched voltage is limited to 150 V AC or 125 VDC (contact open).
The maximum switching power is 10 W.
3.6 Installation of the mounting kit OPEXAL
If external alarm sensors are placed outside the building, the MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage
Protection for external Alarms) is required.
Each MK:OPEXAL protects up to 10 alarm lines which are connected to the ACTM or
ACTM24 against over-voltage.
Install the MK:OPEXAL in accordance to the following figures.
3 AL19P AL13P AL7P AL1P
5 AL20P AL14P AL8P AL2P
7 AL21P AL15P AL9P AL3P
9 AL22P AL16P AL10P AL4P
11 AL23P AL17P AL11P AL5P
Pin no. Signal name
X1
Signal name
X2
Signal name
X3
Signal name
X4
Table 22 Pin assignments ACTM24 connectors X1...X4 (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 86/217
86 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 75 Contents of the MK:OPEXAL
– Drill two holes with 6 mm in diameter and min. 35 mm depth as shown in Figure 76.
– Insert the dowels.
– Attach the MK:OPEXAL to the wall in vertical position and fix it with screws and
washers.
– Connect the cables coming from the external alarm sensors at the left screw termi-
nals of the overvoltage protectors.
– Connect the symmetric pair cables at the right screw terminals of the overvoltage
protectors.
– Attach the ground wire to the yellow / green clamping terminal (see Figure 77).
– Fix all cables with cable ties at the bracket of the MK:OPEXAL
– Route the cables to the ACTM and the ground wire to the PE-plate of the EMI-panel
(see Figure 78).
screw, dowel and washers 6 mm
ground wire
10 symmetric pair
OPEXAL
cables
cable ties
ground terminal(for indoor applications only)
for indoor applications only
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 87/217
DN0932994 87
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 76 Drilling sketch for MK:OPEXAL
Figure 77 Wall mounted MK:OPEXAL
max. 30 mm / 1.18"from the rack edge
8.66"
27.66"
diameter 6 mm
drill hole depth 35 mm
700mm
220 mm
cables fromexternal alarm sensors
symmetric pair cablesto ACTM
ground wireto PE-plate of EMI panel
Input side Output side
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 88/217
88 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 78 Routing of external alarm cables
– Fix external alarm cables with cables ties at the stress relieving bracket, so that a
proper electrical contact between the bracket and the cable screens is guaranteed.
– Attach the ground wire to the bolt at the PE-plate.
– Connect the external alarm cables at the matching spring terminals of the ACTM.
ground boltPE-plate
cable tie
ACTM
stress relieving bracket
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 89/217
DN0932994 89
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.7 Installation of the MK:OPEXAL10V1
Due to the fact that external alarm sensors are located outside the building, the
MK:OPEXAL (Overvoltage Protection for external Alarms) that protects up to 10 alarm
lines is required.
Figure 79 Assembly guideline
Fix the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1at the wall is as described in section 3.6.
To connect the internal and external cables perform the following steps:
1. Attach the inter-connection cable (delivered with the OPEXAL10V1) to the Sub D 25
female connector of the OPEXAL10V1.
2. Route the cable to the ACTM module in the EMI-panel of the base rack.
3. Secure the cable two times at the stress relieving facilities of the mounting bar.
4. Fix the inter-connection cable at the stress relieving bracket of the ACTM with cables
ties, so that the ground contact between cable screen and the bracket is provided.
5. Remove the plugs of the connection blocks X3 and X4 to connect the OPEXAL10V1
module no. 0 and X1, X2 to connect the (optional) module 1.
6. Setup the plugs with the connected wires at the matching blocks.
Figure 80 ACTM, connection of the cables from OPEXAL10V1
mounting bar
ground terminal
ground wire to PE-plate
OPEXAL10V1
to ACTM
from external alarm sensors
SubD 25optional
module0module1
(MK:OPEXALBV1)
cables from
S30864-X210-A105
S30864-X210-A105
OPEXAL10V1from module 1
from module 0
X1X2X3X4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 90/217
90 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X4 Pin Plug X3 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Table 23 OPEXAL10V1 module 0 connection at ACTM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 91/217
DN0932994 91
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
The ground pin of the OPEXAL10V1 has to be connected with the ground terminal,
mounted on the mounting bar MK:OPEXALBV1 (see Figure 81).
The pre-fabricated wire will be delivered with the OPEXAL10V1.
Quad Binder Tape Color Wire Color Plug X2 Pin Plug X1 Pin
1 blue white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
2 orange white/blue 5
white/orange 6
blue 7
orange 8
3 green white/blue 9
white/orange 10
blue 11
orange 12
4 brown white/blue 1
white/orange 2
blue 3
orange 4
5 grey white/blue 5
white/orange 6blue 7
orange 8
6 black white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
red white/blue not used
white/orange not used
blue not used
orange not used
Table 24 OPEXAL10V1 module 1 connection at ACTM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 92/217
92 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 81 Connector assignment of the OPEXAL10V1
The external alarm sensors will be connected with screened twisted-pair cables at the
clamping block of the OPEXAL10V1. The clamping block allows the connection of wires
with a cross section in the range 0,08 - 0,5 mm2. The label of the module gives informa-
tion about the terminal assignment of the clamping block.
In addition, the terminal assignment is displayed in the following figure.
Figure 82 Label with terminal assignment
g NOTE
Do not lay the IN-and OUT cables in parallel.
ground pin
clamping block for connectionof external alarm sensor s
AL29
AL41
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
A L_
P
G N D
A L_
M
AL30
AL42
AL31
AL43
AL32
AL44
AL33
AL45
AL36
AL24
AL37
AL25
AL38
AL26
AL39
AL27
AL40
AL28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
valid alarm no. for module 0
valid alarm no. for module 1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 93/217
DN0932994 93
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.8 External alarm protection for ACTM (EAP)
If external alarm sensors are placed inside the building and the alarm lines more than
30 m long, the External Alarm Protection (EAP) has to be used.
The EAP module will be mounted on the EMI-panel of the rack as shown in Figure 83.
A mounting bracket (2) is provided for the fixing the module. In addition the mounting kit
MK:HPDURV3 (1) is needed to mount the bracket.
Two prefabricated cables (4, 5) will be used for the connections between the EAP (3)
and the ACTM. Both cables are equipped with a SubD 37 female connector at the end
that will be connected at the EAP module and deisolated wire pairs for the connection
at the spring terminals of the ACTM.
One cable is used for transmission of the external alarms, the other one for transmission
of commands.
Two cables (6, 7) with 20 wire pairs each is needed for the connection between the EAP
module and the site specific alarm distribution panel.These cables must be prepared on site. The end of each cable that should be connected
at the EAP has to be equipped with a SubD-37 female connector.
The pinning of the SubD-D37 connectors of the prefabricated cables and the color code
of the wire pairs is given in the following tables.
Figure 83 Mounting of the EAP on the top of the BS-240 II
ACTM
LPA
MSU
OVPT0 OVPT1
PE-bolts
CAN OUT
CAN TEST
-48 V
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.2 CU 0...3
Ext.2 CU 4...7
Serial IF
ground bolts
CAN IN
1
2
367
4 5
45
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 94/217
94 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Pair No. Color Pin No. Pair No. Color Pin No.
1 white 1 10 red 19
blue 2 grey 20
2 white 3 11 black 21
orange 4 blue 22
3 white 5 12 black 23
green 6 orange 24
4 white 7 13 black 25
brown 8 green 26
5 white 9 14 black 27
grey 10 brown 28
6 red 11 15 black 29
blue 12 grey 30
7 red 13 16 yellow 31
orange 14 blue 32
8 red 15 17 yellow 33
green 16 orange 34
9 red 17 18 yellow 35
brown 18 green 36
Table 25 Pin / wire assignment EAP-cable 1 and 2 (Sub-37, female)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 95/217
DN0932994 95
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal
1 white X 10 1 10 red X8 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X4 1
orange 4 blue 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X 8 1 14 black 7grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue X8 4 grey X4 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X 3 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4
Table 26 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 2 at ACTM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 96/217
96 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Pair No. Color Block/Terminal Pair No. Color Block/Terminal
1 white X 9 1 10 red X5 11
blue 2 grey 12
2 white 3 11 black X6 1
orange X9 4 blue X6 2
3 white 5 12 black 3
green 6 orange 4
4 white 7 13 black 5
brown 8 green 6
5 white X5 1 14 black 7grey 2 brown 8
6 red 3 15 black 9
blue 4 grey 10
7 red 5 16 yellow 11
orange 6 blue 12
8 red 7 17 yellow X 7 1
green 8 orange 2
9 red 9 18 yellow 3
brown 10 green 4
Table 27 Wire / terminal assignment EAP-cable 1 at ACTM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 97/217
DN0932994 97
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.9 Alarm collection terminal ACTC - internal alarms / DC
supply
The ACTC is used as a connection board to support single connectors for the internal
alarms (FAN, heat exchanger, temperature sensor, rack in service...) and the DC supply
for the FANs, HX heat exchangers, microwave equipment and smoke sensor.
The ACTC is located in the DC panel of each rack (see Figure 84).
Figure 84 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240)
The following tables provides information about the connecting of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC.
24 1
X36X35X34
X19X18X17
X30X29X28
X33X32X31 X37
X38 X39 X40
X1 X2 X26
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 98/217
98 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
72)
Front side X17, X26 / 11,12 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)8 2) Front side X18, X26 / 9,10 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...36, X26 / 1, 2
(all connected in parallel)
Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
Notes:
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Table 28 ACTC alarms for BS-240 rack types (not for BS-240XL)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 99/217
DN0932994 99
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 85 Connector arrangement at ACTC (BS-240XL)
24 1
X36X35X34
X19X18X17
X30X29X28
X33X32X31 X37
X38 X39 X40 X42
X1 X2X26
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1 / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X1 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X20 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 Rear side X23 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 Rear side X24 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X25 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
5 Rear side X43 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (not installed) (High Active)
6 Rear side X44 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (not installed) (High Active)
9 3) Front side X17-X19, X26 / 7, 8 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X2 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X26 / 5, 6 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 4) Front side X38, X39, X40, X42 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 Rear side X41 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X26 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X28...X36, X26 / 1, 2
(all connected in parallel)
Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X26 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
4) connectors X38, X39 and X40 connected in series inside ACTC and wired to alarm ENVA5
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Table 29 ACTC alarms for BS-240 XL
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 100/217
100 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.10 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-3 - internal alarms /
DC supply
The ACTC-3 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 II / 240XL II. The board is located
in the DC panel of Base- and Extension rack, AD-panel of Service1A rack and in the LE-
panel of the Service2 rack.
Figure 86 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-3
124
X37 X48X45
X20
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (if installed) (High Active)
6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (if installed) (High Active)
7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Front side X45 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed
2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Table 30 ACTC alarms for BS-240 II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 101/217
DN0932994 101
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Rack Service1A / Service2 Rack
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3...7
0 Front side X48 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Rear side X47 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Rear side X21 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Rear side X22 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Rear side X23, Front side X45 / 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
5 2) Rear side X24, Front side X45 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
6 2) Rear side X25, Front side X45 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
7 2) Rear side X43, Front side X45 / 17, 18 FAN6 (High Active) FAN6 (High Active)
8 2) Rear side X44, Front side X45 / 15,16 FAN7 (High Active) FAN7 (High Active)
9 Front side X45 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X45 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
11 3) Front side X37, X45 / 9, 10 Enva4 (High / low Active) Enva4 (High / low Active)
12 Front side X45 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Rear side X41, Front side X45 / 5, 6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High Active) Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High Active)
14 Front side X45 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Front side X45 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed2) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC rear side
3) alarm connection on clamping block X45 in parallel with dedicated connector at the ACTC front side
General: EnVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
Table 31 ACTC alarms for BS-240XL II rack types
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 102/217
102 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.11 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-4 - internal alarms /
DC supply
The ACTC-4 collects all internal alarms of the BS-24o II and BS-240XL II racks and is
located at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks, AD-panel of each Service1A
rack and at the LE-panel of Service2 rack.
Figure 87 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4
The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC-4 for BS-240 II.
LMU SMOKE RDO 24 1
X1 X2 X3 X4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 103/217
DN0932994 103
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
The spring terminal block of the ACTC allows the connection of wires in a diameter
range of 0.08 mm2... 0.5 mm2
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC Base / Extension Service1A / Service2
Rack 0, 1, 2 Rack 3, ..., Rack 7
0 Front side X3 RDO (High Active) RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active) FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active) FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active) FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active) FAN3 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA9)
5 2) Top of PCB X15, Front side X4 / 21, 22 FAN4 (High Active) FAN4 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA10)
6 2) Top of PCB X11, Front side X4 / 19, 20 FAN5 (High Active) FAN5 (High Active)
(if not installed ENVA11)
7 2) Top of PCB X14, Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active) Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 2) Top of PCB X10, Front side X4 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active) Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active) Enva2 (High / low Active)
(MBR) 5)
10 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active) Enva3 (High / low Active)
(BBR) 5)
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE)
(High / low Active)
Enva4 (SMOKE) (High / low
Active)
12 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 7, 8 6) Enva5 (High / low Active) Enva5 (High / low Active) 6)
(MAJ) 5)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 (OVP) 1)(High / low
Active)
Enva6 (OVP) 1) (High / low
Active)
14 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active) Enva7 (High / low Active)
(BCHF) 5)
15 4) Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active) Enva8 (High / low Active)
(48OTB) 5)
1) “High Active” if OVP is installed, 2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated
connector at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated connector
at the ACTC front, 4) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedicated SubD pin of link to
AC7DC, 5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant for Service1A cabinet, 6) Enva5 (AL 12) is not avail-
able, if MAJ alarm is activated (X24 jumper setting: pins 1 and 2 connected), General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant
syntax
Table 32 ACTC-4 alarms for BS-240 II racks
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 104/217
104 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
g NOTE
It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected
to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from
external to internal signal ground.
maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-
resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.
3.12 Alarm collection terminal ACTC-5 - internal alarms /
DC supply
The ACTC-5 collects all internal alarms of the BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks and
is located at the DC panel of the Base- and Extension racks.
Figure 88 Connector arrangement at the ACTC-4
The following table provides information about the connection of internal alarm sensors
at the ACTC-5 for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB.
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension
Rack 0, 1, 2
0 Front side X3/RDO RDO (High Active)
1 Top of PCB X17 FAN0 (High Active)
2 Top of PCB X13 FAN1 (High Active)
3 Top of PCB X16 FAN2 (High Active)
4 2) Top of PCB X12, Front side X4/ 23, 24 FAN3 (High Active)
5 7) Front side X4 / 21, 22 --- (High Active)
6 7) Front side X4 / 19, 20 --- (High Active)
7 Front side X4 / 17, 18 Enva0 (High / low Active)
8 Front side X4 / 15, 16 Enva1 (High / low Active)
9 Front side X4 / 13, 14 Enva2 (High / low Active)
10 Front side X4 / 11, 12 Enva3 (High / low Active)
Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks
LMU SMOKE RDO 24 1
X1 X2 X3 X4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 105/217
DN0932994 105
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
g NOTE
It is recommended to use an opto-coupler for open collector alarm I/F to be connected
to the ACTC-3. This is to avoid detection failures due to galvanic coupling of noise from
external to internal signal ground.
maximum "Alarm Low"-voltage: UceAL-AL_GND < 400mV at Ic = 2mA
minimum "Alarm High"-resistance: RceAL-AL_GND > 500 kOhm
If a switching contact (relay) is used as an alarm source I/F, the maximum "Alarm Low"-
resistance RAL-AL_GND less than 200 Ohm.
3.13 Local maintenance terminal (LMT) interface
A SubD 15 female connector and the RJ45 socket, located at the DC panel of the Base
rack, is the interface for connecting a Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) for commis-
sioning and maintenance purposes.
11 3) Front side X2, Front side X4 / 9, 10 Enva4 (SMOKE) 8)
(High / low Active)
12 Front side X4 / 7, 8 Enva5 (High / low Active)
13 2) Top of PCB X7/OVP, Front side X4/ 5,6 Enva6 )(High / low Active)
14 Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 3, 4 Enva7 (High / low Active)
15 Top of PCB X26, Front side X4 / 1, 2 Enva8 (High / low Active)
2) alarm connection on clamping block X4 (front) in parallel with dedicated connector
at top of ACTC-PCB, 3) alarm connection on clamping block X4 in parallel with dedi-
cated connector at the ACTC front,5) AC/DC alarms (all high active) are only relevant
for Service1A cabinet,7) alarms for former FAN4 and FAN5, cannot used as Enva
alarms because not SW supported 8) High active if MK:SMOKEV4 is installed, Low
active if MK:SMOKEV3 is installed General: ENVA”X” is LMT relevant syntax
AL Connector / Pin on ACTC-5 Base / Extension
Table 33 ACTC-5 alarms for BS-240 IIB and BS-240XL IIB racks (Cont.)
Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
1 --- 6 LMT_SA 11 LMT_RB
2 LMT_TA 7 --- 12 LMT_IB3 LMT_CA 8 GND 13 LMT_SB
4 LMT_RA 9 GND 14 ---
5 LMT_IA 10 LMT_TB 15 ---
Table 34 Pin assignments of the LMT interface
RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name
1 10BT_TD+ 2 10BT_TD-
Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 106/217
106 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3 10BT_RD+ 4 ---
5 --- 6 10BT_RD-
7 --- 8 ---
RJ45 Pin No. Signal Name RJ45 Pin No. Signal name
Table 35 Pin assignments of the LMT RJ45 interface (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 107/217
DN0932994 107
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.14 Antenna connections
The BTSE has to be connected to the transmit and receive antennas. The antenna con-
figuration and the required cabling are dependent on the site and the type of combining.
For detailed information refer to the site-specific documentation or use the correspond-ing customer documents.
For installation and service purposes it is useful to know, which hardware is connected
to which cell. The numbering, seen from the top of the antenna pole, starts at an azimuth
angle of 0° (north) and rotates clockwise.
The first existing cell whose beam centre line lies at 0° or more is defined as cell 0 or
sector 0. The next one following in the same direction cell is cell 1 etc.
In case of omni cell the cell no. is 0.
Figure 89 Cell numbering (top view from the antenna pole)
For detailed antenna configuration, refer to the site-specific documentation.
3.14.1 Preparation of antenna jumper cables
Short jumper cables with a max. diameter 1/2” have to be used for connections between
the antenna cables and the front connectors of the combining modules, because the
thick cables from the antenna are not able to enter the racks.
With regard to the overvoltage protection, it is recommended to ground the outer con-
ductor of antenna feeder cables where they are connected with the jumper cables
outside the BTSE.
sector width 120°
sector angle
directional antenna
pole
sector 0
sector 1
sector 2
N
0°
beam centre line
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 108/217
108 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
These jumper cables must be fabricated of 1/2” highly flexible coaxial cable on-site, if no
pre-fabricated cables should be used.
Fabricate the jumper cables in steps as shown in the following figures.
Figure 90 Tools for jumper fabrication
Figure 91 Parts of the connector unit kit (example)
– Measure the distance between the end of the antenna feeder cable and the front
connectors of the combining modules.
connector head
corrugation nut
fitting ring
emery paper
cleaning tissue
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 109/217
DN0932994 109
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
– Cut the cable to the required length. Do not deform cable outer conductor, by using
too much pressure during the cutting process!
Figure 92 Using the trimming tool
Figure 93 Removal of isolation and deburring of inner conductor
Figure 94 Removal of metal particles
1
2
rotate clockwis e
heat shrink sleeve
fitting ring
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 110/217
110 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 95 Assembly of the connector unit
Figure 96 Fixing of connector unit, removal of outer insulation
Figure 97 Handling of heat protection tape and shrink sleeve
corrugation nut
fitting ring
connector head
20 mm
heat protection tape
heat shrink sleeve
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 111/217
DN0932994 111
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 98 Shrinkage and removal of visible heat protection tape
The jumper cables must be routed through the cable feeding module forward to the 7/16”
front connectors of DUAMCO/FICOM/MDUX and to N-type male connector of DIAMCO.
g NOTE
Fix the jumper cables at 7/16 connectors with a torque wrench set to 25 Nm.
N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight". There doesn't appear to be a consen-
sus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector suppliers recommends a torque of
approx. 1,00 Nm.
g NOTE
Note that being able to close the doors means that the depth of the right angle connector
is not allowed to exceed 45 mm.
Figure 99 Max. dimensions of the antenna connectors
Connect the antenna cables to the combining equipment as follows:
– Unscrew the front part of the cable feeding module.
– Route the antenna jumpers to the rack, which has to be connected.
– For grounding remove outer insulation approx. 20 mm for proper contact with the
metal lids of the cable feeding module (see Figure 102).
remove extra lengthof heat protection tape
hot air stream
max. 1.8”/45 mm
max. 1/2” jumper cablewidth across flats 32
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 112/217
112 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
– Feed the jumpers through the cable feeding module forward to the front connectors
of antenna combiners.
– Fix the jumpers at the connectors TX/RX of combiners.
– Bend the jumpers into the correct position for easy closing of cable feeding module. – Screw the front part of the cable feeding module in its original position.
Figure 100 Opening of the cable feeding module
Figure 101 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 113/217
DN0932994 113
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 102 Antenna jumpers at the cable feeding module
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 114/217
114 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
3.15 Installation of TMA or MHA
Tower mounted amplifiers and mast head amplifiers are used to reach a BTS sensitivity
better than GSM requirements at the antenna connector and to compensate a high
antenna cable loss.
The TMA/ MHA should placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be supplied
and supervised by the multicoupling equipment (DIAMCO or DUAMCO) in the rack it is
connected to.
When using a DUAMCO as antenna combiner inside the rack, only one feeder cable is
needed between the TMA and the BTS (for both TX and RX signals) due to full duplex
architecture of the TMA / MHA.
Figure 103 Position of TMA (DUAMCO combiner used)
If a FICOM as antenna combiner inside the rack, the TMA is used in conjunction with a
DIAMCO and it only amplifies the overall BTS uplink signal.
Figure 104 Position of TMA (FICOM combiner used)
If a TMA used together with HPDU, a DUBIAS is required for powering and signalling of
the TMA.The configuration is shown in figure below and the installation in Figure 105.
Base Rack
DUAMCO CU
TMATMA
TMA TMA
Base Rack
DIAMCO CU
FICOM
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 115/217
DN0932994 115
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
Figure 105 Configuration with HPDU, DUBIAS and TMA
Figure 106 Installation of TMA and DUBIAS
3.15.1 Installation of the TMADV1
Two 7/16 female connectors, located at the bottom of the TMADV1 (lettered ANT and
BTS) are the interfaces for connection of the 1/2” antenna jumper cables that connect
the TMADV1 with the antenna and the antenna feeder cable towards to the BTS.
The TMA can be pole-or wall mounted in vertical position only.
The location of the external interfaces is shown in Figure 107.
The mounting of the TMA may be done as follows in accordance with Figure 108.
– While still on ground, join each of the 2 brackets with one screw M8, but leave the
brackets open. Be sure not to loose the remaining 2 screws.
– Position the TMA on the mast/pole and tighten the remaining 2 screws.
– Connect the TMADV1 with the jumper cables to the antenna feeder cable and the
antenna. Do not forget to consider thermal dimensional changes of the antenna
feeder cable.
– Attach the ground wire to the ground screw of the TMADV1 and connect the wire at
nearest grounding facility at the mast or pole. The ground wires eyes must have the
right size for the TMA‘s M8 ground screw and the cable should be have a cross
section not less than 16 mm2.
TMATMA
DIAMCO
FICOMHPDUDUBIAS
RX1RX2
RX8
CU1CU2
CU8
FICOMFrom
RXIN
BIASPATH
TMAto
DIAMCO
ANT1ANT0HPDU2
DIAMCO
RXOUT
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 116/217
116 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Figure 107 Bottom view of the TMADV1 (Single TMA)
g NOTE
Note, that the max. diameter of the mast do not exceed 140 mm, if the fixing material
will be used as shown in the following figure.
Figure 108 TMA with mounting brackets
The TMADV1 may be also mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws (not supplied
with the TMADV1)
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper
way of mounting the TMA on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can only
be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself does probably not
provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
f WARNING
It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding cable to the
TMA‘s grounding point. Pay attention to the thermals dimensional changes of the
antenna feeder cable.
AN T(input/output
towards TX/RX antenna)
(input/outputtowards BTS)
BT S
grounding point
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 117/217
DN0932994 117
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3.15.2 Installation of the STMAx / DTMAx
The Single Tower Mounted Amplifiers (STMAx) and the Dual Tower Mounted Amplifiers
(DTMAx) are the RF units that provide the means to feed the downlink signal to one
TX/RX antenna and to amplify, with low noise figure, the uplink signal coming from thesame TX/RX antenna.
The DTMAx / STMAx should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It will be
supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is connected to.
Various versions for different frequency bands of the DTMA and DTMARET are avail-
able.
Figure 109 Example of STMAx and DTMAx
Figure 110 Rear side of STMAx and DTMAx (example)
g NOTE
It is recommended to mount the DTMAx and the STMAx at pole or wall in a vertical posi-
tion, so that the ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.
In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-
ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.
The DTMAx and the STMAx provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with
the BTSE (lettered COM) and the antenna (lettered ANT).
Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r
Dual Tower Mounted Amplifie r Single Tower Mounted Amplifie r
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 118/217
118 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
Each DTMAx / STMAx shall be grounded to the pole, therefore a grounding wire has to
be prepared for each device on site.
The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded
hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have theright size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less
than 16 mm2.
The other end of the grounding wire should be safely connected to a well grounded point
on the pole.
Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the
mounting plate (see rear view of the devices). This is the situation just before tightening
the hose clips.
Figure 111 Example of pole mounting with the DTMAx
For the mounting, the following steps can generally be recommended:
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.
2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.
3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.
4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten (see Figure 111).
5. Remove the tensioning belt.
6. Connect the DTMAx / STMAx via a 1/2” jumper cable to the antenna feeder cable
(connector COM) and to the antenna jumper cable (connector ANT). The torque
must be 25 - 30 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
The DTMAx / STMAx may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and
dowels (not supplied with the device).
hose clips
tighten
tighten
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 119/217
DN0932994 119
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
The corresponding holes in the mounting plate have a diameter of 9 mm. The proper
way of mounting the device on a wall varies from case to case. The best method can
only be decided by the installer. Please note, however, that the wall itself probably does
not provide adequate grounding, it may be insulated.
g NOTE
It is absolutely necessary to prepare and connect an adequate grounding wire to the
STMAx / DTMAx nearest grounding point. The cross section of the ground wires should
be not less than 16 mm2.
g NOTE
Pay attention to the thermal dimensional changes of the antenna feeder cables.
f WARNING!
Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without
fall protection equipment.
3.15.3 Installation of the MHA
The mast head amplifier MHA should be placed as close to the antenna as possible. It
will be supplied and supervised by the multicoupling equipment in the rack it is con-
nected to.
Various versions for different frequency bands of the MHA are available.
g NOTE
It is recommended to mount the MHA at pole or wall in a vertical position, so that the
ground screw of the units is pointing downwards.
In certain cases is the mounting in a horizontal position (e.g., on cable runways) possi-
ble, it depends on the environmental conditions.
BTS type MHA type frequency band
BS-24x / BS-4x with MFDUAMCO or
FICOM6
MDTA 850 MHz
MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz
MDDA 1800 MHz
MDPA 1900 MHz
Table 36 Types of the MHA
MHA type frequency band outer dimension in mm (HxWxD)
MDTA 850 MHz 350 x 210 x 100
MDGA E-GSM / 900 MHz
MDDA 1800 MHz 295 x 210 x 65
MDPA 1900 MHz
Table 37 Types of the MHA
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 120/217
120 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
External cabling activities
The MHA can be mounted with hose band clips at poles or at the wall with screws and
dowels.
The unit provides 7/16 female connectors for the connection with the BTSE (lettered
BTS1 / BTS2) and the antenna (lettered ANT1 / ANT2).The unit provides a ground screw with a locking washer attached to it and a threaded
hole for connection of the grounding wire. The grounding wire cable lug must have the
right size for the M8 ground screw. The cross section of the ground wire must be not less
than 16 mm2.
In case of pole mounting, it is recommended to perform the following:
Hose clips surrounds the pole and are fitted into the corresponding openings of the
mounting plate.
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at the pole.
2. Secure the unit with a tensioning belt.
3. Close the hose clip loosely around the pole.4. Tighten the hose clip screws carefully, but do not over-tighten.
5. Remove the tensioning belt.
6. Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1
and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and
ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.
7. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
8. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
Figure 112 Example of pole mounting
The may be mounted on a wall by means of suitable screws and dowels (not supplied
with the device). In this case proceed as follows:
1. Place the unit in its final mounting position at wall and mark the 4 drilling points.2. Drill the holes with a twisted widia drill (d=8 mm) to a depth of 50 mm.
hose clips
tighten
tighten
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 121/217
DN0932994 121
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
External cabling activities
Id:0900d805807bc8d9
Confidential
3. Insert the dowels and fix the MHA with 4 screws M8.
4. Connect the MHA with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna feeders (connectors BTS1
and BTS2) and with 1/2” jumper cables to the antenna (connectors ANT1 and
ANT2). The torque must be 25 - 30 Nm.5. Connect the grounding wire with the ground screw of the unit. Tighten the connec-
tion to a torque of 5 Nm.
6. The use of self-vulcanizing tape as an environmental protection of the connectors is
recommended.
f WARNING!
Pay attention to the regulations for working in dangerous heights. Do not work without
fall protection equipment.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 122/217
122 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4 Rack completionThe racks are shipped including equipment components, pre-installed by the manufac-
turer in accordance with customer configuration:
– Sub-rack, which holds several boards and modules
– DC panel
– Backplanes (multi-layer PC-boards, which are mounted at the rear side of the
subrack) and internal cabling
– Heaters and fan units
– Core modules and carrier related modules
– AC/DC converters
– Semi-rigid cables for setup of the system cabling
The following items are planned for installation after setup of the racks on site:
– Backup batteries
– Cabling between the racks (e.g. battery cabling, DC-cabling, CAN-BUS)
– Link equipment
For cable routing from one rack into another one two ways can be used. The CAN-Bus
cables and the SELIC-Bus cables will be routed above the EMI panels.
Without leaving the EMC-protected area (e.g. DC power supply, battery cables), an
interconnection hole in upper area of the side walls of each rack is provided. The holes
are covered by plates for single racks and the end-racks of a row.
The two mounting kits EMC as shown in the following figure contain all of the parts that
are needed for connection of two racks.
Figure 113 Contents of the connection kits
Mount the parts of the connection kits in the following order:
– Loosen the security screws M3 of the cover part (Figure 114) or break out the pre-
perforated part of the appropriate side panel (Figure 115).
– BS-240 / 240XL: Setup the 8 sealing stripes (1) at the edges of the holes of both
adjoined racks. Move the racks close together.
– BS-240 II / 240XL II: Move at first the adjoining racks close together. Push the 4
contact springs (2) over the adjacent edges of both racks.
12
3
4
3
4
MK:EMCRV1 (BS-240 / 240XL) MK:EMCR-2V1 (BS-240 II / 240XL II)
2) Contact springs1) sealing stripes
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 123/217
DN0932994 123
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
– Connect the racks to one common unit with nut and screw M8x20 (3) and install the
ground wire (4) between the ground bolts of both racks (Figure 116).
Figure 114 Setup of EMC sealing stripes (BS-240 / 240XL)
Figure 115 Setup of EMC sealing contact springs (BS-240 II / 240XL II)
Figure 116 Connection of the racks (example with BS-240)
unscrew the 10 screws M3
1
2
2
3
4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 124/217
124 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
g NOTE
The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-
2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with with
an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connectionsbetween racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 125/217
DN0932994 125
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.1 Preparation of the top cover
Before starting the connection of external cables, prepare the top cover for later routing
the cables through the cover to the infrastructure equipment on site.
For this purpose the top cover provides removable pieces as shown in the figure below.
The required number of pieces can be removed in easy manner by breaking out at the
perforation. After that refinish the paint coat at all cracks with the paint retouch kit
(Siemens Serial No. A500-C101-B261).
The sharp edges of the break-outs will be covered with the sealing profile tape (Siemens
Serial No. C42127-Z1-C661). It will be delivered in 100 cm sections and must be cutted
in the required length.
Figure 117 Paint retouch of the top cover
Figure 118 Placement of the sealing profile tapes
The EMI-panel of the BS-240 (IIB) and BS-240XL (IIB) racks are covered with the top
cover MK:ROOF-2BV1. It provides at all side3 panels removable pieces for cable
routing.
The required number of pieces has to be cracked out with a side cutter or a metal saw:
The breaking points have to be deburred, to avoid injuries during the cable installation.
sealing profile tape
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 126/217
126 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 119 Removable pieces of the MK:ROOF-2BV1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 127/217
DN0932994 127
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.2 Overview of battery sets
To enable easier transportation and setup of Service Racks, they can be delivered
without backup batteries. The battery tray can be equipped with different types of bat-
teries. The installed battery type depends on the required backup time. Each battery setconsist of 4 batteries. If a label relevant to the characteristics of the batteries is delivered,
then should be this label placed on the door of the rack.
The following battery types can be installed in the first generation of BS-240 / 240XL.
Table 39 shows the battery types, which can be installed in the racks of BS-240 II and
BS-240XL II.
The charging mode of the battery system has to be selected dependend on the installed
battery type. Therefore the Local Maintenance Terminal (LMT) with an appropriate
software load has to be connected with the RS 232 interface of the DCBCCTRL.
The following table gives information about the correct selection.
g NOTE
The battery type Oerlicon 12C@2000 and 12CP70 comply to Hawker/Power Safe-
charging mode and not to charging mode of Oerlicon (CP80 & CP10).
Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity
Excide, A400/85 BATTPACKV1 MK:BATTPACKV1 85 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP80 BATTPACKV2 MK:BATTPACKV2 80 Ah
Oerlikon, 12CP100/19” BATTPACKV3 MK:BATTPACKV3 100 Ah
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah
Table 38 Overview of backup battery sets (BS-240 / BS-240XL)
Supplier BATTPACK type MK:BATTPACK type Capacity
EnerSys, 12V92F BATTPACKV4 MK:BATTPACKV4 92 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV5 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
Oerlikon, 12C@2000 BATTPACKV7 MK:BATTPACKV5 55 Ah
Table 39 Overview of backup battery sets BS-240II / BS-240XL II)
battery type charging mode to be selected
Sonnenschein A400/85 select “Sonnenschein”
Oerlicon CP100 select “Oerlicon”Oerlicon CP 80 select “Oerlicon”
Oerlicon 12C@2000 select “Power Safe”
Oerlicon CP70 select “Power Safe”
Hawker 12V92F select “Power Safe”
Table 40 Battery charging modes
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 128/217
128 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.3 Installation of backup batteries in service rack
g NOTE
If the rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are installed on site, no Service1 or
Service1A rack is used. The battery sets, installed in Service2 racks have to be con-
nected to the DC supply equipment, provided by the customer.
g NOTE
BS-240 / 240 XL: As up to 2 AC/DC frames can be installed in the Service1 rack. An
identification of the AC/DC controllers is needed. The first AC/DC frame is installed in
the upper position.
Dip switches at the front of the AC/DC controller are used for selecting the Slot ID. The
following combinations are not permitted: Slot ID bit 0/1 = “ON/ON” or “OFF/OFF”. The
capacity of the installed battery systems has to be selected at the Dip switch rows of the AC/DC controller. For detailed information refer to ITMN:BTSE.
g NOTE
In a BS-240XL / XL II Service2 rack the extra space must not be used for a fourth set ofbatteries.
If the Service1A / Service2 racks are equipped with battery trays MK:BATTFIXCB,
before setup of the batteries, the spacer strips (1) have to be placed at the rear and the
front edge of the battery tray. Additional spacer blocks (2) are used to provide a distance
of 10 mm between the batteries. They will be fixed at the batteries as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 120 Parts for battery fixing
Slot ID bit 0 Slot ID bit 1
upper frame (AC/DC 1) ON OFF
lower frame (AC/DC 2), if installed OFF ON
Table 41 Selection of slot ID (BS-240 / 240 XL)
1
2
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 129/217
DN0932994 129
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 121 Placement of the spacer strips
The bracket that fix the batteries inside the battery tray has to be removed, before setup
of the battery set.
A second variant of the battery tray will be equipped with fixing plates to provide space
between the batteries. Proceed in accordance with the following figure:
– Remove the MK:BATTERY from the battery tray before fitting of the batteries.
– Mount the battery fixing plates at the bottom section of the battery tray.
Figure 122 Preparation of the battery tray
g NOTE
Whenever an AC-supplied BTS version in non-operational state is disconnected from
external power supply, i.e. during storage/transport or service & maintenance, the BTS-
internal battery system must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery
circuit breaker:BR33 (AD panel, Service1 cabinet)
bracket
spacer strips
loosen the screws
MK:BATTERY fixing plate
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 130/217
130 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.3.1 Installation of backup batteries type “Excide”
Install and connect the backup batteries “Excide” (formerly “Sonnenschein”) in accor-
dance with Figure 123 and Figure 124 in the following steps:
– Switch OFF the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) and atmounting kit battery (Service2).
– Put on the battery 2 and 3 into the battery tray.
– Connect the short cable with battery 2 (- terminal) and battery 3 (+ terminal).
– Connect one of the long cables at battery 2 (+ terminal) and battery 3 (- terminal)
– Move battery 2 and 3 as far as stop to the rear side of the battery tray.
– Put on battery 1 and 4 into the tray.
– Connect the long cable coming from battery 2 (+ terminal) at battery 1 (- terminal)
and the long cable coming from battery3 (- terminal) at battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 4 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the tempresistorcable to battery 1 (+ terminal).
– Fasten the battery nuts to a torque of 20 Nm. Close and tighten both velcro straps.
– Turn up the protection cap to the end position, during fasten the cables to the battery
terminals (avoid contact of metal).
f WARNING!
Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidental short circuits.
Figure 123 Battery tray with backup batteries type “Excide”
battery2
battery 1
battery3
battery 4
velcro straps
air vent tube s
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 131/217
DN0932994 131
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 124 Connection of backup battery set “Excide”
Setup the battery air vent system in accordance with the figure in steps as follows:
– Setup a plastic angle (1) at the air outlet of each battery.
– Fix one of the 4 clear plastic tubes (2) at each angle.
– Connect the tubes of battery 2 and 3 with the T-connector (3).
– Connect the tubes of battery 1 and 4 with cross-connector (4).
– Setup the connection between the T-connector and the cross-connector. Use the
short plastic tube (5).
– Connect the long clear plastic tube (6) at the cross-connector.
– Equip the other end of the tube with the outlet nipple (7).
– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards to the cable feeding module.
– The outlet part will be placed inside the cable feeding module.
– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.
The second T-connector (8) will be used for connecting the air vent system of a second
battery tray.
gNOTEIn order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-
tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical
direction.
+ +
++
1
2 3
4
- 48 V (blue)
+ 0 V (black)
tempresistor cable(color as shown not relevant)
air vent tube, routed via RF cable entry outside the rack
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 132/217
132 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 125 Contents of the air vent kit “Excide”
Figure 126 Assembly of the air vent kit “Excide”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
2
1
1 1
1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 133/217
DN0932994 133
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.3.2 Installation of backup batteries type “Oerlicon”
For installation of an “Oerlicon” battery set proceed in accordance with Figure 127 and
Figure 128 in steps as follows:
– Switch off the circuit breaker at AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or of ADP(BS-240 II / 240 XL II - Service1A) and mounting kit battery (Service1A / Service2).
– Put on the battery 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
– Connect the + terminal of battery 1 and the - terminal of battery 2 with the short metal
bridge.
– Connect the following batteries in the same way.
– Connect the blue load-cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and the black load-cable and
the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Tighten the battery termination fixing screws to a torque with 6 Nm.
– Tighten the cable termination fixing screws to a torque with 20 Nm.
gNOTETurn up the protection cap to the end position, during tighten the cables to the battery
terminals (avoid contact of metal). The battery capacity must be adjusted at the AC/DC
(BS-240 / 240 XL) controller.
f WARNING!
Only use insulated tools for connecting the cables to the battery terminals in order to
avoid accidental short circuits.
After all electrical connections are complete, setup the air vent system:
– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) at the air vent nipples of battery 2 and 3.
– Fix the longer plastic tubes (2) at the air vent nipples of battery 1 and 4.
– Connect the 4 tubes at the collector part (3).
– Connect the long clear plastic tube (4) at the collector part.
– Route the tube along the right side rack frame upwards through the cable feeding
module.
– The tube must be fixed at the rack frame with cable ties.
g NOTE
In order to avoid the accumulation of hydrogen gas, please make sure to install the ven-
tilation tube parts in a straight line and as short as possible, without any loops in vertical
direction.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 134/217
134 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 127 Connection of backup batteries (Co. Oerlicon)
Figure 128 Air vent system for Oerlicon battery set
1 2 3 4
Temp-resistor cable
battery cable -48 V
battery cable +0V
air vent system
++
++
_
_ _ _
1
2
3
4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 135/217
DN0932994 135
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.3.3 Installation of backup batteries type “EnerSys / Hawker”
Before starting the installation of the battery sets switch “OFF” the circuit breaker at the
frame AC/DC 1-2 (BS-240 / 240 XL - Service1) or at the AD-panel (BS-240 II/240 XL II
- Service1A).
Figure 129 Location of the Battery Breakers at the AD-Panel ADPAV3
Install and connect the “EnerSys” batteries (formerly “Hawker”) according to Figure 130
and Figure 134 as well as the following steps:
– Place batteries 1,2,3 and 4 into the battery tray.
– Mount the MK:BATTERY in its original position.
– Connect the battery 1 (+ terminal) and battery 2 (- terminal) with the short metal
bridge and tighten the nuts with a torque of 5 Nm.
– Connect the following batteries in the same way.
– Fasten the accompanying protecting caps over the battery terminals.
– Remove the protection cover of the MK:BATTERY.
– Connect the blue load cable to battery 1 (- terminal) and connect the black load
cable and the temp-resistor cable to battery 4 (+ terminal).
– Using a wrench set to a torque of 5 Nm, fasten the battery cable nuts.
– Shift the protection caps of both battery cables to the end position to covering of the
battery poles.
Figure 130 Placement and connection of the batteries
switch OFF
bracket
1 2 3 4
+ _
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 136/217
136 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 131 Detail of the connection of battery 4
f WARNING!
Use only insulated tools to connect the cables to the battery nuts to avoid accidental
short circuits!
After all of the electrical connections are complete, install the air vent system of the
battery set. It consist of 2,00 m plastic tube and 3 T-collectors. The plastic tube has to
be cutted into pieces with the length as shown in Figure 132:
tempresistor cable
distance piece
“+” pole cable to MK:BATTERY
battery 4
metal bridge
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 137/217
DN0932994 137
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 132 Parts of the air vent system
– Fix the short clear plastic tubes (1) to the air vent connectors of batteries 2,3 and 4.
– Fix the plastic tube (2) at the air vent connector of battery 1.
– Connect the a T-collector part (3) at the tubes of battery 2,3 and 4.
– Attach tube (2) of battery 1 to the T-collector of battery 2.
– Connect the T-collectors of battery 2 - 3 and 3 - 4 with the 100 mm tubes (4).
– Connect the pre-installed plastic tube that is routed to the gas outlet of the rack atthe T-collector of battery 4. Fix the tube at the rack frame with cable ties.
Figure 133 Routing of the air vent tubes
170 mm
100 mm
70 mm
2
1
3
4
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 138/217
138 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
The MK:BATTERY has to be connected with the DC input terminals of the AD-panel.
The pre-fabricated cables have to be attached to the “+” pole and the“-” pole of the
MK:BATTERY.Fix the cables at the mounting bars with cable ties as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 134 Connection between the batteries, battery cable connection
+
+
_
_
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 139/217
DN0932994 139
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4 Inter-rack cable routing (standard configuration)
This chapter provides information about the cable connections from one rack to another,
dependent on the BS-240 / 240XL or BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types and configurations.
g NOTE
The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-
2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with
an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connections
between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible, if these rack
types will be used.
4.4.1 Battery cabling of BS-240 / 240XL
An overview of the battery interrack cabling for BS-240 and BS-240XL is provided in the
tables below.
g NOTE
Note: If the Service1 rack is equipped with two frames AC/DC (1 and 2) and only BAT0
and BAT1 should be connected to the AC/DC frames, connect BAT0 with F:AC/DC1 and
BAT1 with F:AC/DC2.
battery
system
battery
cable no.
from to length color
BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-26b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1500 mm blue
111/1 S1-AC/DC1-25b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1500 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-28b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 2850 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-27b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 2850 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 3700 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 3700 mm blackBAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4200 mm black
Table 42 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240)
battery
system
battery
cable no.
from to length color
BAT 0 110/1 S1-AC/DC1-20b S1/BAT0/- (-48V) 1750 mm blue
111/1 S1-AC/DC1-19b S1/BAT0/+ (+0V) 1750 mm black
BAT 1 110/2 S1-AC/DC1-22b S2/1 BAT1 -1a 3300 mm blue
111/2 S1-AC/DC1-21b S2/1 BAT1 -2a 3300 mm black
BAT 2 110/3 S1-AC/DC2-15b S2/2 BAT2 -1a 4200 mm blue
111/3 S1-AC/DC2-14b S2/2 BAT2 -2a 4200 mm black
Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 140/217
140 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 135 Terminal blocks for battery cables
BAT 3 110/4 S1-AC/DC2-17b S2/3 BAT3 -1a 4700 mm blue
111/4 S1-AC/DC2-16b S2/3 BAT3 -2a 4700 mm black
battery
system
temp-resistor-cable
no.
from to length
BAT 0 112/1 S1/BAT0 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T0 2500 mm
BAT 1 112/2 S2/1 BAT1 (+) S1/ AC/DC1 T1 2500 mm
BAT 2 112/3 S2/2 BAT2 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T0 5500 mm
BAT 3 112/4 S2/3 BAT3 (+) S1/ AC/DC2 T1 5500 mm
Table 44 List of temp-resistor cables
battery
system
battery
cable no.
from to length color
Table 43 List of battery cables between the racks (BS-240XL) (Cont.)
T0
T1
25 26 27 28
a a aa
bbbb
+ +- -
BAT0 BAT1
terminal blockAC/DC1 frame
T0
T1
14 15 16 17
a a aa
bbbb
+ +- -
BAT2 BAT3
terminal blockAC/DC2 frame
a b c
12
terminal block battery frame
0 V
-48 V
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 141/217
DN0932994 141
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 136 Overview of the battery cabling BS-240 / 240 XL
ϑ ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
frame AC/DC 1
T1 T0
frame AC/DC 2
T1 T0
112/4
110/4111/4
112/3
110/3111/3
112/2
110/2111/2
110/1111/1
112/1
BAT3 BAT2 BAT1 BAT0
top cover air vent air vent air vent air vent
temp-resistor
cable
Service 2/3 Service 2/2 Service2/1 Service1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 142/217
142 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.4.2 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
An overview of battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with the AD
panel variant ADPAV3 is shown in the following table.
Cable
No
From To Color Length
m
Factory No.
S30861-*
418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
418 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 1,50 X215-A70
418 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 1,70
419 /1 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (-) *1) blue 2,71 X215-A71
419 /2 S1/A:MK: Battery 1 S1/A: ADP/BAT0 (+) black 2,71
422 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 1,71
422 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 blue 1,71 X215-A74
422 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/2: MK: Battery 3 black 1,71
423 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1/A: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
423 /1 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 *2) blue 3,00 X215-A76
423 /2 S2/1:XL MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1/A: XL: MK: Battery 1 black 3,00
140 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0,60
140 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 blue 1,00 X216-A74
140 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0,60
141 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) blue 0,60141 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0,40
*1) If required, adapt or shorten the cable length
*2) Only in case of XL-Rack: use the longer cable 423 instead the cable 422.
Table 45 List of battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A with ADPAV3)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 143/217
DN0932994 143
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
f WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,
use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Figure 137 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
Cable
No
Signal Name From To Factory No.
S30864-*
53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,(+0V) *1)
X216-A92
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Table 46 Battery sensor cabling
Battery 2
1 6 0 A
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
Battery 2
Battery 3
1 6 0 A
1
6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Battery 1 Battery 1
LE panel
AD panel
AC/DC frame
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
141141
141141
141
422418
140
140140
Service 1Service 2/1
BAT
ϑ
ϑ
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 144/217
144 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 138 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADPAV3)
Figure 139 Overview of battery breakers in S1A / S2
Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1
Battery 2 Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 2
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
HU for LE 0 - 5or
Battery 3
1 6 0 A
HU for LE 0 - 5
423
422
418
141141141141
141141
141
141
422
140140
140
140
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A
AD panel
LE panel(S1/A)
LE panel (S2)
AC/DC frame
LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)
BAT1)
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
160A
B A
160A
A B
160A
A B
160A
B A
1 8 0 A
A
B B R 3
3
1)
1)
1)
1)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
MK:BATTERY 2)
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
BAT / -48V
from AC/DC system
to subsequent Service2 cabinet
AD panel (ADP)
0V -48V
s e t o f b a t t e r i e s i n
s e t o f b a t t e r i e s i n S e r v i c e 1 A
1) battery breaker alarm line to ACTC
2) MK:BATTERY is integral part of
F:BARTTERY
S e r v i c e 2
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 145/217
DN0932994 145
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4.3 Battery cabling for BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
The battery intra-/interrack cabling for BS-240 II and BS-240XL II with AD panel variant
ADP-2V1 is shown in the following table.
Cable
No
From To Color Length
m
Factory No.
S30861-*
518 /1 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or2 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;
240XL
blue 1.90 X215-A190
518 /2 S1A:MK: Battery 1 or 2 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 2.10
519 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (-) 240;
240XL
blue 3.10 X215-A191
519 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: ADP/BAT (+) black 3.30
522 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;
240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 240;
240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 black 2.40
522 /1 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 240;
240XL
blue 2.60 X215-A159
522 /2 S2/3:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/2: MK: Battery 3 black 2.40
523 /1 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 240;
240XL
blue 3.00 X215-A160
523 /2 S2/1:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S1A: MK: Battery 1 or 2 black 2.70
523 /1 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 240 blue 3.00 X215-A160
523 /2 S2/2:MK: Battery 1, 2 or 3 S2/1: MK: Battery 1 black 2.70
540 / 1 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 240;240XL
blue 0.55 X215-A158
540 / 2 MK: Battery 1 MK: Battery 2 black 0.55
540 / 1 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 240;
240XL
blue 0.55 X215-A158
540 / 2 MK: Battery 2 MK: Battery 3 black 0.55
541 / 1 F: Battery - 48V MK: Battery (2b) 240;
240XL
blue 0.265 *1)
541 / 2 F: Battery 0V MK: Battery (1a) black 0.275
*1) only for battery pole with tapped hole M8: S30864-X215-A161; only for battery pole with tapped hole M10:
S30864-X215-A162
Table 47 Battery cables between the racks of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
Cable
No
Signal Name From To Factory No.
S30864-*
53 BATT TEMP F:AC/DC / CTRL / X11 F:Battery, +POL,
(+0V) *1)
X216-A92
*1) Connect the battery sensor to the upper Service1- battery. If there is no battery
installed, connect the sensor to the upper battery of Service2 rack.
Table 48 Battery sensor cabling
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 146/217
146 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
f WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of DC supply connections at the AD panel connectors,
use only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Figure 140 Example of battery cabling of BS-240 II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
Battery 1 Battery 1Battery 1Battery 1
Battery 2 Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 2
HU for LE 0 - 5or
Battery 3
HU for LE 0 - 5
523
141541541541
541541
541
541
522
540540
540
540
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1/A
LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)LE panel (S2)FAN#0 FAN#1
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
518
540 540
540
540
522
FAN#0 FAN#1
518-1 or 519-1518-2 or
If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2should be used to connect theMK: Battery with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
B
E2
E1
Batt519-2
*1)
*1)
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 147/217
DN0932994 147
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 141 Example of battery cabling of BS-240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
Battery 2
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
Battery 2
Battery 3
Battery 1 Battery 1
6 x HU for LE 0 - 5
541541
541541
541
522518
540
540540
Service 1Service 2/1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
540
540
540
518-1 or 519-1518-2 or
If the cables 518 1/2 or 519 1/2
should be used to connect theMK:Battery with a Service1A Rack,equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
B
E2
E1
Batt 519-2
*1)
*1)
ϑ
ϑ
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 148/217
148 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.4.4 Battery alarm cable connections
The cable connections of the battery breaker alarm is shown in the circuit diagram
below. The alarm terminals of each MK:Battery within a service rack will be connected
in series to lead them to the alarm-terminal of the ACTC.
Figure 142 Battery alarm cables
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2or ADPA/F:ACTC
C NONC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
C NONC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
463
462
463
Service2/n
Cable 462: S30864-X211-A173 (Set: 2 x 462)
Cable 463: S30864-X211-A174
FAN#0 FAN#1
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1aMK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
C NO NC
160 AA B
1c 1b1a
MK:BATTERY
+ -BAT / -48 V
463
462
462
Service1A
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 149/217
DN0932994 149
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4.5 DC cabling between the racks (BS-240 / 240XL)
The DC cabling is required for routing of the -48V voltage from the DC panel of Service1
rack to the DC panels of all installed racks on site for power supply of the boards in Base
and Extension racks and the link equipment inside the Service racks.RF
Figure 143 Routing of the DC power supply wires
Figure 144 DC terminal block access of BS-240 / 240XL
Figure 145 Routing of DC cabling between the BS-240 racks
unscre w
+0 V -48 V
DC supply wires
33 1)
34 1) 35 1)
36 1)
DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack Extension2 Rack
terminal block
279 2)
1) Component of MK: CARSV1
2) S30864-X211-A69
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 150/217
150 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 146 Routing of DC cabling between BS-240XL racks
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel
Service1 Rack
to rack color
33 0 V-48 V
13b14b
Service 2 / 5bService 2 / 2b
blackblue
34 0 V
-48 V
11b
12b
Base / 9b
Base / 4b
black
blue
35 0 V
-48 V
9b
10b
Extension 1 / 9b
Extension 1 / 4b
black
blue
36 0 V
-48 V
7b
8b
Extension 2 / 9b
Extension 2 / 4b
black
blue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel
Service2/x Rack
to DC-Panel
Service2/x+1 Rack
color
279 0 V
-48 V
5a
2a
5b
2b
black
blue
Table 49 List of DC cable connections between BS-240 racks
33 1)
34 1) 35 1)DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel DC-Panel
Service2 Rack Service1 Rack Base Rack Extension1 Rack
279 2)
1) Component of MK: CARSV1 2) S30864-X211-A69
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 151/217
DN0932994 151
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel
Service1 Rack
to rack color
33 0 V
-48 V
11b
12b
Service2 / 5b
Service2 / 2b
black
blue
34 0 V
-48 V
9b
10b
Base / 10b
Base / 5b
black
blue
35 0 V
-48 V
7b
8b
Extension1 / 8b
Extension1 / 4b
black
blue
DC- Cabling to further Service2/x
cable no. polarity from DC-Panel
Service2/x Rack
to DC-Panel
Service2/x+1 Rack
color
279 0 V
-48 V
5a
2a
5b
2b
black
blue
Table 50 DC cable connections between the BS-240XL racks
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 152/217
152 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.4.6 DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
The figure below shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADPAV3 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of BS-240 II / 240XL II.
Figure 147 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
f WARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.
BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06BR07BR08
ACTC0V-48V
+ ++
Service1 A Base Extension1 Extension2
415
413 415
414
414
413
DC panel
ACTC
- -- -+
+ -
LE
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1
12
X29
BR 33
Service Socket
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
FAN0 FAN1
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1 FAN0 FAN1 AC/DC
AD-Panel ADPAV3
cable
no.
polarity from to rack color Factory-
No.
S30864-*
Length
m
413/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A56 1,50
413/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black
414/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A57 2,20
414/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black
415/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A58 2,80
415/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black
Table 51 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADPAV3)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 153/217
DN0932994 153
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4.7 -48V DC connections BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
The following figure shows the DC power distribution from rack Service1A, AD panel
ADP-2V1 to the Base and Extension racks (DC panel) of the BS-240 II / 240XL II.
Figure 148 DC cabling between the BS-240 II / 240 XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
fWARNING!
Short circuit risk! For fastening of all DC supply connections at the connectors, use
only an insulated hexagonal screw key/ratchet (M6).
Optional: The Base and Extension racks can be also connected to an external DC power
supply via an own rack-internal MSU:DC, located at the EMI panel. In this case a
Service1 / Service1A rack is not necessary.
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5 C
O B A
0
C O S A 0
C O B A
1
C O S A
1
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
DC-Panel DC-Panel AD-Panel ADP-2V1
513-1513-2
514-1514-2
515-1515-2
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
If the cables 513 - 515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel ADPAV3,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
DC-Panel
513-2
513-1
514-2
514-1
515-2
515-1DCP:LEBREAK
B
E2
E1
Batt
cable
no.
polarity from to rack color Factory-
No.
S30864-*
Length
m
513/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:B Base blue X215-A192 1,15
513/2 0V S1/A:ADP:B Base black 1,10
514/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 blue X215-A193 1,75
514/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E1 Extension1 black 1,70
515/1 -48V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 blue X215-A194 2,35
515/2 0V S1/A:ADP:E2 Extension2 black 2,30
Table 52 DC cable connections between BS-240 II / 240XL II racks (S1A, ADP-2V1)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 154/217
154 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.4.8 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to
the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-
necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example ofDC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations
are listed in Table 53. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,
the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.
The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.
Figure 149 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK2
Service1A
AC/DC frame
406406
402
Service2/3 Service2/2 Service2/1
403
1)
403
2)
4033)
4034)
2): if Service1A without DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment3), 4): if Service 2/1 with additional second DC panel: LEBREAK and Link Equipment
for 1), 2), 3) and 4) see also table below
+ ++
ACTC
- -- -+
+ -
LE
180A
BE1E2 BE1E2BAT0 1
12
X29
BR 33
AD Panel
Service Socket
0V
LE breaker
-48V
+ + - -
FAN0 FAN1
ACTC
0V -48V
X10
+ -X10DCP:LEBREAK
ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10
DCP:LEBREAK2 ACTC
0V-48V
+ -X10
DCP:LEBREAK2
+ -
cable
no.
polarity from to rack color Factory-
No.
S30864-*
Length
m
402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A40 1,20
0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 1) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 black
403, 2) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:ADP:x29:1 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:ADP:x29:2 black
403, 3) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:3 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
403, 4) -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:4 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A41 1,20
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 155/217
DN0932994 155
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4.9 -48 V DC for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
The DC Link Equipment Panel provides the distribution of the -48 V supply voltage to
the modules within the BS-240 II / 240XL II Service2 racks. The clamp terminals for con-
necting the DC supply wires are located on the front of the panel. A routing example of
DC cables is shown in the following sketch. The cable types for possible configurations
are listed in Table 54. If link equipment is installed in the Service1A and Service2 racks,
the associated DC:LE panel must be equipped with an appropriate number of breakers.
The LE breakers can be plugged-in during the installation of link equipment.
Figure 150 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
406 -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80
0 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
406 -48 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X215-A80 0,80
0 V S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
cable
no.
polarity from to rack color Factory-
No.
S30864-*
Length
m
Table 53 Cables for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADPAV3) (Cont.)
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5 C
O B A
0
C O S A 0
C O B A
1
C O S A 1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2 Rack Service1A Rack Base Rack
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-Panel AD-Panel
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
33/M
402
503
Service2 Rack
X29
F:ACTC
DCP:LEBREAKX10
DCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK
X10X10
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
with LE in Service1A
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 156/217
156 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 151 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
CU#0
CU#1
CU#4
CU#5 C
O B A
0
C O S A 0
C O B A
1
C O S A 1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#2 FAN#3
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A Rack Base Rack
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
DC-Panel AD-Panel
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
33/M 503
X29
F:ACTCDCP:LEBREAK2 DCP:LEBREAK
X10X10
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Service2 Rack Service2 Rack
1 6 0 A
without LE in Service1A
cable
no.
polarity from to rack color Factory-
No.
S30864-*
Length
m
402 -48 V S1/A:ADP:x29:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-A40 1,20
0 V S1/A:ADP:x29:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
503 -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:2 blue X215-
A164
1,30
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S1/A:DCP:LEBREAK:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-
A152
0,90
0 V S2/1:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
33/M -48 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:2 blue X211-
A152
0,90
0 V S2/2:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 S2/3:DCP:LEBREAK2:x10:1 black
Table 54 DC cabling for link equipment of BS-240 II / 240XL II (S1A, ADP-2V1)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 157/217
DN0932994 157
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.4.10 CAN-Bus connections BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II
The CAN-Bus will be routed in loop configuration through the racks to collect external
and internal alarms and lead them to the ACT of the Base rack.
The configuration rules for CAN-Bus connections are valid for BS-240 / BS-240XL and
BS-240 II / 240XL II rack types.
The assignment of the cable length to the rack configuration is dependent on the
mounting sequence. The CAN-Bus must be terminated at the end (CAN OUT) with the
terminating resistor S30861-K2047-K. This measure is mandatory.
The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided
inside the Rack roof/cover area.
The Table 55 and the Figure 153 show an example of CAN-Bus connections.
Figure 152 Location of CAN-Bus interfaces
cable no. from CAN OUT to CAN IN Code no. length
245 Base Service1 S30864-X210-A11 1200 mm
246 Service1/ Service1A Extension1 S30864-X210-A12 1900 mm
247 Extension1 Service2/1 S30864-X210-A13 2600 mm
248 Service2/1 Extension2 S30864-X210-A14 3300 mm
249 Extension2 Service2/2 S30864-X210-A15 4000 mm
Cables for configurations with distance between
the cabinets
S30864-X210-A60 6800 mm
S30864-X210-A61 7800 mm
S30864-X210-A63 5000 mm
S30864-X210-A66 12000 mm
Table 55 Example for CAN-Bus cabling
C A N
I N
C A N O U
T
C A N T E
S T
a t i n
g r e
s i s t o r
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 158/217
158 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 153 Example for CAN-Bus cable connections
4.4.11 CAN-Bus cabling of 240 IIB, BS-240XL IIB
The Rack inter-connection for CAN-bus cable is from Rack top to Rack top and guided
inside the Rack roof/cover area. Therefore, pre-fabricated cables have to be used.
The cable routing is illustrated by the following figures. The CAN-bus has to be termi-
nated with a termination resistor, delivered with the Base rack together.
Figure 154 CAN-bus connectors on the top of the rack
Service2/2 Service2/1 Service1 Base Extension1 Extension2
245
246
248
249
247
CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
terminatingresistor
rear side
(for BS-240/-240II only)
- 48 V
SERIAL IF CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
- 48 V
SERIAL IF CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN TEST LPA
- 48 V
SERIAL IF
EMI-P: RS EMI-P: RB EMI-P: RE
front side of racks
of racks
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 159/217
DN0932994 159
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 155 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240 IIB racks
Figure 156 CAN-bus cabling of BS-240XL IIB racks
The following Can bus cable can be ordered:
4.4.12 CC-Link cabling of BS-240/240 II, BS-240XL/240XL II
The SELIC-cabling (CC-link) provides a connection between the core modules in the
Base rack and the carrier units in the Extension racks.These connections are absolute
required for transmission of signalling and alarms between the racks. The interfaces are
located on the EMI panel of Base- and Extension racks.
In a standard configuration the same type of racks will be connected only. For each con-
nection (Base to Extension1/2), prefabricated cables are provided. These cables
(S30864-X210-A2, -A23, -A38) are component of the relevant Extension racks.
cable no. from to
14 CAN out Base rack CAN in Extension 1
CAN out Extension 1 * CAN in Extension 2 *
*) BS-240 IIB only
Table 56 CAN bus cabling between BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks
cable length factory no.
1,90 m S30864-X210-A12
3,30 m S30864-X210-A14
12,00 m S30864-X210-A66
Table 57 CAN bus cables for BS-240 IIB / 240XL IIB racks
CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN OUT
termination resistor
BASE EXTENSION 1 EXTENSION 2
EMI-panel EMI-panel EMI-panel
CAN OUT
CAN IN
CAN OUT
termination resistor
BASE EXTENSION
EMI-panel EMI-panel
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 160/217
160 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 157 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240)
Figure 158 CC-link cables between the racks BS-240 / 240 II
Rack-
type
Cable
no.
From interface
Base Rack
To interface Exten-
sion Rack
Factory
No.:
S30864-*
Cable
length
BS-240 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A2 1975 mm
Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7
Table 58 List of CC-link cables BS-240
Ext. 1 CU 0...3
Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext. 2 CU 4...7
Ext. 2 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
(Ext.2) CU 0...3
(Ext.2) CU 4...7
CU 4...7
CU 0...3
Base Rack Extension 1 Rack Extension 2 Rack
277
278
CU 4...7
CU 0...3
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 161/217
DN0932994 161
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 159 Location of CC-link interfaces (BS-240XL)
Figure 160 CC-link cables between BS-240XL / 240XL II racks
Rack-
type
Cable
no.
From interface
Base Rack
To interface Exten-
sion Rack
Factory
No.:
S30864-*
Cable
length
BS-240 II 277 Ext. 1 CU 0...3 Extension 1 CU 0...3 X210-A38 1920 mm
Ext. 1 CU 4...7 Extension 1 CU 4...7
278 Ext. 2 CU 0...3 Extension 2 CU 0...3
Ext. 2 CU 4...7 Extension 2 CU 4...7
Table 59 List of CC-link cables BS-240 II
Ext. 1 CU 8..11
Ext. 1 CU 0...3
Ext. 1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Base Rack Extension 1 Rack
330
Ext.1 CU 8...11
Ext.1 CU 4...7
Ext.1 CU 0...3
Ext.1 CU 8...11
162161
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 162/217
162 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.4.13 CC-link cabling between BS-240 IIB/240XL IIB racks
The signal transfer between the rack is carried out by the cabling as shown in the follow-
ing figures.
Figure 161 CC-link interfaces on the top of Base rack
Figure 162 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks
Rack type Cable
No.
From interface
Base Rack
To interface Exten-
sion Rack
Factory
No.:
S30864-*
Cable
length
BS-240XL 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm
162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11
BS-240XL II 161 Ext.1 CU 0...3 Extension1 CU 0...3 X210-A23 915 mm
162 Ext.1 CU 4...7 Extension1 CU 4...7
330 Ext.1 CU 8...11 Extension1 CU 8...11
Table 60 CC-link cables of BS-240XL and BS-240XL II
Base Extension 1 Extension 2
CU 0-7 CU 8-15 CU 16-23
CU 16-23 red
CU 16-23
CU 8-15 red
CU 8-15
CU 8-15 red
CU 8-15
CU 8-15 red
CU 8-15
optional
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 163/217
DN0932994 163
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 163 CC-link cables between BS-240XL IIB racks
g NOTE
Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connec-
tions to avoid transmission troubles!
Cables for link redundancy are optionally.
Cable
No.
from Base rack to Extension 1 or 2 rack Factory
No.:S30864-*
Cable
length
10 CU 8...15 Extension1 CU 8...15 X215-A232 2,83 m
10 CU 16...23 Extension2 CU 16...23
11 CU 8...15 Extension1 CU 8...15 X215-A231 5,83 m
11 CU 16...23 Extension1 CU 16...23
10 CU 8...15 red. Extension1 CU 8...15 red X215-A232 2,83 m
10 CU 16...23 red Extension2 CU 16...23 red
11 CU 8...15 red Extension1 CU 8...15 red X215-A231 5,83 m
11 CU 16...23 red Extension1 CU 16...23 red
Table 61 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks
Base Extension 1
CU 16-23 red
CU 16-23
CU 8-15 red
CU 8-15
optional
CU 16-23 red
CU 16-23
CU 8-15 red
CU 8-15
CU 0-11 CU 12-23
Cable
No.
from Base rack to Extension Factory
No.:S30864-*
Cable
length
12 CU 8...15 CU 8...15 X215-A232 2,83 m
12 CU 16...23 CU 16...23
13 CU 8...15 CU 8...15 X215-A231 5,83 m
13 CU 16...23 CU 16...23
12 CU 8...15 redundancy. CU 8...15 redundancy X215-A232 2,83 m
12 CU 16...23 redundancy CU 16...23 redundancy
Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 164/217
164 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
g NOTE
Only cables the cable as defined in the table above have to be used for CC-link connec-
tions to avoid transmission troubles!
Cables for link redundancy are optionally.
13 CU 8...15 redundancy CU 8...15 redundancy X215-A231 5,83 m
13 CU 16...23 redundancy CU 16...23 redundancy
Cable
No.
from Base rack to Extension Factory
No.:
S30864-*
Cable
length
Table 62 CC-link cables between BS-240 IIB racks (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 165/217
DN0932994 165
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5 Inter-rack cabling (mixed configuration)
This chapter provides information about the cable connections between racks, depen-
dent on the rack type and equipping variant (BS-240 / 240XL with BS-240 II / 240XL II).
Inter-rack cables are not pre-installed in the factory and foreseen for setup on site.
The required distances rack rear to wall must be considered. The required minimum dis-
tances for the rack variants are listed in . In case of mixed configuration, the BS-240
racks have be shifted 50 mm away from the wall, to allow the rack interconnection of
both rack types.
g NOTE
The rack types R:BS80-2V7 with serial no. S30861-C2050-X (BS-240 II) and R:BS120-
2V6, serial no. S30861-C2051-X (BS-240XL II) are not equipped with
an interconnection hole in the side panels. From this follows, that cable connections
between racks without leaving the EMC protected space are not possible, if these rack
types will be used.
The -48V DC cable connection between the racks will be routed through the cut-outs at
the side walls of the racks.
The power cables of the BS-240 cabinets are routed behind the DC-Panel cover and the
power cable of the BS-240 II cabinets are routed visible in front of the DC-Panel.
If racks have to be fixed to the floor with earthquake kits, the relevant minimum distance
to the wall is 150 mm.
The covered cut-outs plates at the sides of the rack and the break-out pieces of the top
covers of first and second generation are not corresponding. Therefore the rack inter-
connections for SELIC-, CAN-Bus- and EMC/grounding have to be routed through
removed break-out pieces at the rear of the rack‘s top covers (see Figure 164).
Figure 164 Adaptation of the top cover for interrack cable routing
g NOTE
According to the relevant EMC requirements, the top cover of the rack have to be
mounted always!
2. Generation1. Generation
View of rear side
Cover
Cables: e.g. CAN-Bus
SELIC
EMC-cable
Cover
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 166/217
166 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.1 Battery cabling between BS-240 and BS-240 II racks
The battery backup time of already installed BS-240 racks can be extended with addi-
tional battery sets inside of BS-240 II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will used
for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240 II), cable kits are provided for the
connection of BS-240 II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-240 Service1
rack.
Figure 165 Example of battery cabling with BS-240 and BS-240 II Service racks
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/2
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/3
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
F:AC/DC 1
110/1
111/1
168
166
BAT0
110/4M
111/4M
110/3M
111/3M
HU # 5 for LE
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 4 for LE
168
168
182 181
LE-Panel
BAT1
BAT1
1 6 0 A
166
166
110/2
111/2
F:AC/DC 2
110/4M
111/4M
110/2
111/2
to S2/3
from S1
Service2/1 Service1
BS-240 II Rack BS-240 II Rack BS-240 RackBS-240 Rack
111/3M
110/3M
BAT2
BAT2
BAT2
BAT3
BAT3
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
2625 27 28
+ +- -
BAT 0 BAT 1
F:AC/DC 1
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
1514 1617
+ +- -
BAT 2 BAT 3
F:AC/DC 2
112/2ϑ
112/1ϑ
112/3ϑ
112/4ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
ϑ
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 167/217
DN0932994 167
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
gNOTE
The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum
current rating of 75 Ampere.
If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,
the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:
– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).
– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the
second generation. Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set
of the relevant MK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must
be implemented.
Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color
110/1/M111/1/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-A146
1300 mm blueblack
110/2/M
111/2/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-28b
S1/F:AC/DC1-27b
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-)
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-
X211-A147
3300 mm blue
black
110/3/M
111/3/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-15b
S1/F:AC/DC2-14b
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-)
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-
X211-A148
3700 mm blue
black
110/4/M
111/4/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-17b
S1/F:AC/DC2-16b
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-)
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-
X211-A149
4600 mm blue
black
Table 63 Battery cable kits for connection BS-240 with BS-240 II S2 racks
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X210-A51 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X210-A52 5500 mm
Table 64 Overview of the tempresistor cables
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 168/217
168 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.2 Battery cabling between BS-240XL and BS-240XL II racks
The battery backup time of already installed BS-240XL racks can be extended with addi-
tional battery sets inside of BS-240XL II racks. In addition to the battery kits that will used
for connections between the battery sets and connection of the battery sets with the AC/DC frames (BS-240XL) or with the AD-Panel (BS-240XL II), cable kits are provided
for the connection of BS-240XL II Service2 racks with the AC/DC frames in the BS-
240XL Service1 rack.
Figure 166 Example of battery cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2
FAN#0 FAN#1
FAN#0 FAN#1
F:AC/DC 1
110/1
111/1
168
166
110/4M
111/4M
110/3M
111/3M
F:AC/DC 2
110/2
111/2
Service1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 RackSIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
FAN#0 FAN#1
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
166
168
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
S2/3to
S1from
ϑ ϑϑ
S2/2to
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
2625 27 28
+ +- -
BAT 0 BAT 1
F:AC/DC 1
T0
T1
a
b
a a a
b b b
1514 16 17
+ +- -
BAT 2 BAT 3
F:AC/DC 2
112/2ϑ
112/1ϑ
112/3ϑ
112/4ϑ
first Generationsecond Generation second Generation
BAT1BAT2 BAT 0
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 169/217
DN0932994 169
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
g NOTE
The terminal clamps of MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (with 50A breaker) have a maximum
current rating of 75 Ampere.
If the 50A rating of each battery set is not sufficient for the relevant BTS configuration,
the following changes are necessary in service racks of first generation:
– Replacement of each MK:BATTERYV1/...V2 (50A) by a MK:BATTERYV4 (160A).
– Replacement of the old battery cabling by the standard battery cable set for the
second generation.
Exception: for the connection of booth poles of each battery set of the relevantMK:BATTERYV4, the specific cable pair (S30864-X216-A75) must be implemented.
Cable no. From To Factory no. length Color
110/1111/1
S1/F:AC/DC1-26bS1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 (-)S1 BAT0 (+)
S30864-X211- A33
1750 mm blueblack
110/1/M
111/1/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-26b
S1/F:AC/DC1-25b
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (-)
S1 BAT0 with MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-
A133
1750 mm blue
black
110/2/M
111/2/M
S1/F:AC/DC1-28b
S1/F:AC/DC1-27b
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (-)
S2/1 BAT1 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-
A134
3300 mm blue
black
110/3/M
111/3/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-15b
S1/F:AC/DC2-14b
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (-)
S2/2 BAT2 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-
A135
4200 mm blue
black
110/4/M
111/4/M
S1/F:AC/DC2-17b
S1/F:AC/DC2-16b
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (-)
S2/3 BAT3 MK:BAT (+)
S30864-X211-
A136
4700 mm blue
black
Table 65 Battery cables for BS-240XL Service1 with BS-240XL II Service2 racks
Cable no. from to Factory no. length
112/1 Service1, BAT 0 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 0 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm
112/2 Service2/1, BAT 1 (+) Service1 AC/DC 1, T 1 S30864-X211-A44 2500 mm
112/3 Service2/2, BAT 2 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 0 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm
112/4 Service2/3, BAT 3 (+) Service1 AC/DC 2, T 1 S30864-X211-A45 5500 mm
Table 66 Overview of the tempresistor cables
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 170/217
170 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.3 Battery cabling activities
Connect the battery sets with the corresponding AC/DC frame as follows
– Connect the wire 110/*/M (blue) at the -48 V terminal and the 111/*/M wire (black)
at the +0 V terminal of the MK:BATTERY. – Tighten the connection with torque wrench SW13 to 15 Nm.
– Attach the cable lug of the tempresistor cable 112/* to the + pole of the battery set.
– Route the wires through the rack interconnection holes the Service1 rack.
– Remove the cover plate of the AC/DC frame.
– Insert the wires into the matching WAGO terminals of AC/DC frame 1 or 2 in accor-
dance with Figure 168.
– Plug in the tempresistor cables at the sockets T 0 and T1 (see Table 64 for BS-240
and Table 66 for BS-240XL).
Figure 167 Battery Cables 110*/M and 111*/M
Figure 168 WAGO terminal for battery cabling at F:AC/DC
connection with F:AC/DC
Connection with MK:Battery
precutted
in the factory
BAT 2 BAT3
- + -+
BAT 0 BAT1
- + -+
F:AC/DC 1 F:AC/DC 2
T0
T1
T0
T1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 171/217
DN0932994 171
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5.4 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / Base, Extension
An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second
generation) is shown in Figure 169.
Figure 169 -48V DC connections BS-240 / S1 and BS-240II / Base and E1
The following rule must be taken into account:
– The DC-breaker ratings of Service1 are limited (50A) for DC power supply the Base
and Extension racks. Therefore only CU configurations can be implemented in Base
and Extension, which DC supply currents not exceed the breaker rating of 50A.
ACTC0V-48V
DC-Panel
Base Extension1
BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
Service1
b b
bbbbbbbb
a a a a a a a a aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Base
to Ext.1(to Ext.2)(to Serv.2)
1)
1) Type of cable (16 mm 2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C105 (black)
first Generationsecond Generation
second Generation
1)
C39195-Z70-C66 (blue)
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05BR06
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 172/217
172 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.5 -48V DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, Extension
The Figure 170 shows an example for the -48V power supply connection of a Service1A
rack BS-240 II with Base and Extension BS-240. The Service1A rack is equipped with
the AD-panel ADPA.
g NOTE
If a Service1A supplies a Base (second generation) or an Extension (second genera-
tion) the 80A DC-breakers (AD-panel: BR28, BR29 and BR30) must be replaced by a
50A type! This reduction in power for the affected rack must be considered for configu-
ration planning! Therefore a mounting kit must be ordered with three 50A breakers
(Factory no.: S30864-X215-A126).
Figure 170 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / Base, E1 (S1A, ADPAV3)
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
461 S1A/ADPA/B/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.6 m S30864-X215- A127
S1A/ADPA/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
462 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V
S1A/ADPA/E1/ 0V
Extension1/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V
Extension1/DCP inside/ 9b/0V
blue
black
2.2 m S30864-X215-
A128
463 S1A/ADPA/E2/ -48V
S1A/ADPA/E2/ 0V
Extension2/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V
Extension2/DCP inside/ 9b/0V
blue
black
2.8 m S30864-X215-
A129
Table 67 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1/2 (S1A, ADPAV3)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 173/217
DN0932994 173
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
If the Service1A is equipped with an AD-panel ADP-2V1, connect it with the Base- and
Extension racks of the BS-240 as shown in the figure below.
Figure 171 DC cables from Service1A to Base and Extension1(S1A, ADP-2V1)
FAN#0 FAN#1
DCP:LEBREAK
ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHE
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
a
a
b
b
c
c
d
a
b
c
4
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b2357810111213
a
b
c
1
a
b
c
6914
a
a
b
b
c
c
d
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
-48V -48V0V0V
513 514
513-1513-2
514-1514-2
515-1515-2
AD-Panel ADP-2V1
513 514 515*
515* to Extension2
Service1A Base Extension1second Generation first Generationfirst Generation
DCP:RSHBDCP:RSHB
If the cables 513-515 1/2should be used to connect theBase- and Extension Racks with a Service1ARack, equipped with AD-panel AD PA,cut off the connectors and remove 24 mm ofthe insulation.
Batt
Cable no. from to Color Length Factory No.
513 S1A/ADP-2V1/B/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 1.15 m
1.10 m
S30864-X215-
A192S1A/ADP-2V1/B/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
514 S1A/ADPA/E1/ -48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue
black
1.75 m
1,70 m
S30864-X215-
A193S1A/ADP-2V1/E1/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V
515 S1A/ADP-2V1/E2/-48V Base/DCP inside/ 4b/-48V blue 2,35 m
2,30 mS1A/ADP-2V1/E2/ 0V Base/DCP inside/ 9b/0V black
Table 68 Cables from Service1A to Base and Extension 1/2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 174/217
174 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.6 -48V DC cabling BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2
An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-
tion) is shown in Figure 172.
g NOTE
For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-
tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory.
Figure 172 DC cabling between BS-240 / S1 and BS-240 II / S2 racks
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
HU # 4 for LE
HU # 5 for LE
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Ra ck
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Service 1
b b
bbbbbbbb
a a a a a a a a aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Base
to Ext.1
(to Ext.2)
(toServ.2)
first Generation
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel (S2)
ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1
second Generationsecond Generation
33/M
33
to Service2/3
Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx
Type of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
3333/M
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 175/217
DN0932994 175
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5.7 DC cabling BS-240 II / S1A and BS-240 / S2
An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)
is shown in Figure 173 (example with AD-panel ADPA).
g NOTE
Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first
generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.
g NOTE
The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must
not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)
Figure 173 DC cables between BS-240II/ S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADPAV3)
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Pane
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LE
AD Panel180A
BR 33
BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V
X29
FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
402
Service1AService2/1Service2/2
second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
453
45333/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)
Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)
Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
1 6 0 A
HU # 4for LE
HU # 5for LE
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 176/217
176 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 174 DC cables between BS-240UII/S1A and BS-240/S2 (S1A, ADP-2V1)
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1Asecond Generation
ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
first Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
33/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
33/M
503
503
Cable No. 503: S30864-X215-A164, length 1.30 mCable No. 33/M: S30864-X215-A152, length 0.90 m
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 177/217
DN0932994 177
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5.8 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / Base, Extension
An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Base and Extension cabinets (second
generation) is shown in Figure 175.
Figure 175 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XLII / Base, E1
ACTC0V-48V
DC-Panel
Base Extension1
BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06
ACTC0V-48V
DC panel
Service1
b
b
bbbb
bb
a a
a a aa
aa a a
aaa
b
b b
b
b
c c c c123478910111213
DCP:R12S1
(to Serv.2)
1)
1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)
first Generation second Generationsecond Generation
1)
C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03 BR04BR05 BR06
34
35
56
(Component of MK:CARSV1 / S30864-X215-A28)
to Ext.1
to Base
FAN0 FAN11 FAN0 FAN1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 178/217
178 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.9 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, Extension
The Figure 176 shows an example of the -48V power supply connections between a
Service1A rack and Base / Extension rack (first generation).
Figure 176 DC connections between BS-240XLII / S1A and BS-240XL / Base, E1
b
a
aa a a
b
b b b
c c c
1237891011 45a
b
a
b
c
b
a
6
a
b
b
a a
b
c c
b
a a
b
c c
1213
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LE
AD Panel180A
BR 33
BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V
X29
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A
ACTC ACTC
DCP:R12B DCP:R12E
Extension1Base
to AD Panel S1A to AD Panel S1A
-48V0V
second Generation first Generationfirst Generation
DC-Panel DC-Panel
c
b
a
b
aa a a a
b
b b b
c c c c
1238910111213 56
b
a a
b
c c
4a
b
c
b
a
7
a
b
b
a a
b
c c
b
a a
b
c c
1415
413 414
-48V0V
1) Type of cable (25 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C134 (black)
C39195-Z70-C135 (blue)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 179/217
DN0932994 179
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5.10 DC cabling BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2
An example of mixed configuration, Service1 with Service2 cabinets (second genera-
tion) is displayed in Figure 177.
g NOTE
For the combination of Service1 with Service2 racks (second generation) the implemen-
tation of the DCP:LEBREAK2V2 is mandatory!
Figure 177 DC connections between BS-240XL / S1 and BS-240XL II / S2
HU # 0for LE
HU # 1for LEHU # 2for LEHU # 3for LEHU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE
SIEMENS0V-48V
LEPanel(S2) ACTC
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service2/1 Rack
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
Service1
b b
bbbbbbbb
aaaaaaaa a
a aa
a
aa
b
bb
b
bc c cc c
123456789101112131415
DCP:RSHS1
to Baseto Ext.1(to
Serv.2)
first Generation
SIEMENS0V-48V
LEPanel (S2) ACTC
Service2/2 Rack
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1
second Generationsecond Generation
33/M
33
to Service2/3
Cable 33: component of MK:CARSVx
Type of cable (10 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C103 (black)
C39195-Z70-C65 (blue)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X211-A152Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
3333/M
HU # 0for LEHU # 1for LEHU # 2for LEHU # 3for LEHU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE
FAN#0 FAN#1
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 180/217
180 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.5.11 DC cabling BS-240XL II / S1A and BS-240XL / S2
An example of mixed configuration, Service1A with Service2 cabinets (first generation)
is shown in Figure 178.
g NOTE
Service1A racks must not be connected to battery sets installed in Service2 racks of first
generation! Only link equipment can be installed in Service2 rack.
g NOTE
The total current consumption of all link equipment of Service1A/Service2 racks must
not exceed 25A. (DC breaker rating of Breaker25 in Service1A: 25A)
Figure 178 DC connections between BS-240XL II/ S1A and BS-240XL / S2
SIEMENS
0V -48V
LE Panel
HU # 0 for LE
HU # 1 for LE
HU # 2 for LE
HU # 3 for LE
ACTC
- -- + ++ -+
+ -LE
AD Panel180A
BR 33
BE1E2 BE1 E2 10-48V
X29
1 6 0 A
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1 ACTC ACTC
DCP:RSHS2 DCP:RSHS2
33/M
402
Service1AService2/1Service2/2
second Generationfirst Generationfirst Generation
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
aa a
aa
b
b b
b
b
c c cccc c
b
aaa a
bb b123456789
0V -48V 0V -48V
to Service2/3 to Service2/2
453
45333/M
33/M33/M
to Service2/1 to Service1A
Cable 402: S30864-X215-A40; component of MK:CAR-2S1Vx (Service1A rack)
Type of cable (2,5 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C113 (black)
C39195-Z70-C114 (blue)
Cable 453: S30864-X215-A119
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
Cable 33/M: S30864-X215-A152
Type of cable (6 mm2): Factory No.: C39195-Z70-C89 (black)
C39195-Z70-C88 (blue)(high power cable type)
33/M
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 181/217
DN0932994 181
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.5.12 SELIC-cabling between the racks (mixed configuration)
In case of extension of an existing Base Station system with additional Extension racks
the following combinations are possible:
– BS-240 Base -> BS-240 II Extension
– BS-240 Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension
– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240 Extension
– BS-240 II Base -> BS-240XL / 240XL II Extension
– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 Extension
– BS-240XL / 240XL II Base -> BS-240 II Extension
The necessary cables for extension combinations have to be ordered additionally (see
Table 69 and Table 70). For mixed configuration with distance between the racks (Table
70) the cable sets include an appropriate CAN-Bus cable.
Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*
BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /
240XL II Ext.
BS-240 Base cable length see standard
configuration
1920 mm 1460 mm
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A27
BS-240 II Base cable length 1920 mm see standard
configuration
1460 mm
S30864-* X210-A68 X210-A69
BS-240XL /
240XL II Base
cable length 1460 mm 1460 mm see standard
configurationS30864-* X210-A74 X210-A75
Table 69 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration without distance between cabinets)
Rack type Selic cable lengths with Factory No.: S30864-*
BS-240 Ext. BS-240 II Ext. BS-240XL /
240XL II Ext.
BS-240 Base cable length 4120 mm or
6970 mm
4070 mm or
6920 mm
3612 mm or
6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A123 or
A118
X211-A132 or
A133
X211-A125 or
A120
BS-240 II Base cable length 4070 mm or
6920 mm
4070 mm or
6920 mm
3612 mm or
6462 mm
S30864-* X211-A132 or
A133
X211-A126 or
A121
X211-A134 or
A135
BS-240XL /
240XL II Base
cable length 3612 mm or
6462 mm
3612 mm or
6462 mm
3114 mm or
5960 mm
S30864-* X211-A136 or
A137
X211-A138 or
A139
X211-A122 or
A116
Table 70 SELIC-cabling (mixed configuration with distance between cabinets)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 182/217
182 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.6 Combination of racks with different heights
4.6.1 BS-240 II / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension
A BS-240XL II Extension rack can be added to an existing BS-240 II Base rack to
increase BTS capacity.
Figure 179 DC connection (BS-240 / S1A with BS-240XL II / Extension)
Use the following pre-fabricated cables for connection of the racks:
– Cable 414: DC cable pair (25 mm2) with braided shield, copper wires 0.15 mm,
tinned, C39195-Z70-C158 (BK Type S07V-C4V5-K)
– Cable 446: Grounding cable (16 mm2), C39195-Z70-C105 (BK Type S07V-K)
The outer insulation of both DC-cables that to be routed through the cable feeding
module of the Service1A rack has to be removed at the EMC-gasket (see Figure 180).
This measure guarantees a proper contact between the cable screen and the mesh
screened rubber profiles.
0V-48VLEPanel
HU # 0 for LEHU # 1 for LEHU # 2 for LEHU # 3 for LE
ACTC
--- +++ -+
+ -LE ADPanel 180 ABR33
B E1E2B E1E2 10-48VX29
1 6 0 A
FAN#0 FAN#1
Service1A
HU # 4for LEHU # 5for LE
ACTC0V-48V
Base
BR07BR08BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06
Extension1
BR01BR02BR03BR04BR05BR06
ACTC0V-48VDCpanel
FAN0 FAN1
FAN0 FAN1
MSU:DCcable duct
cable ties
screening measuresee view A
screening measuresee view B
BS-240 II BS-240 II BS-240XL II
414
413
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 183/217
DN0932994 183
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 180 (View A) Preparation of the DC cables at the cable feeding module
Route the DC-cables to the rear side of the Extension rack in a suitable cable duct.
Remove the insolation of the cables approximately 15 mm for contact of the screen to
the stress relieving clamp at the right edge of rack (Figure 181). Connect the cables 414-
1 and 414-2 to the terminal block of the MSU:DC.
Figure 181 (View B) Cable connections to ground and MSU:DC of Extension
The connection between the racks will be completed by the routing of the common
ground cable no. 446. The cable is equipped with cable lugs at both ends and will be
attached to the M8 ground bolts at the rear side of the EMI panel.
For SELIC cabling refer to the chapter 4.5.12.
For CAN-Bus cabling refer to the chapter 4.4.10.
4.7 Combination of racks with a gap between the racks
4.7.1 BS-240XLU II, Service1A / Extension with BS-240XLU IIB, Base
The racks can be installed with a gap between the racks as shown in the following figure.
1 5 m m
-48V +0V
EMC - bar
414
cable ties
stress - relieving
to MSU:DC
DC -cables from Service1A rack
screen connection
from Service1A rack
common ground cable446
414-1414-2
-48V+0V
rear side of rack
grounding bolts
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 184/217
184 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 182 Combination of BS-240XLU II with BS-240 XLU IIB racks
Before starting the installation, pay attention to the following rules:
• The racks of the B-version (in this case the Base rack) do not provide an opening in
the side panel for the DC cables to the Service 1A rack.
• The unused opening in the side wall of the BS-240 XLU II Extension rack has to be
closed with it‘s cover plate.
• Use cables with braided shield only.
• Route all cables from the Base rack to the Service 1A / Extension rack inside a cable
duct.
• Store the extra length of pre-fabricated cables in the cable duct.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 185/217
DN0932994 185
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 183 Cable connections between BS-240 XLU II and BS-240 XLU IIB racks
Further informations are provided in the section “Combination of racks with different
heights”.
Select the CC-link cables dependend on the required length and connect them accord-
ing the following tables:
Cable
no.
Code-no. from
Base B-version
to
Extension A-version
length
600 S30864-
X215-A235
CU12...15, connector C CU12...15, connector B
connector A, not conn.
3,20 m
CU12...15 redundancy
connector D
CU12...15, connector B
connector A, not conn.
600 S30864-
X215-A235
CU16...23, connector C CU16...19, connector A
CU20...23, connector B
CU16...23 redundancy
connector D
CU16...19, connector A
CU20...23, connector B
Table 71 CC-cables l=3,20 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 186/217
186 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
The figure below shows the CC-link connections between the racks. Note, that connec-
tors “D” of the Base rack will remain unplugged, if no link redundancy is required.
Figure 184 CC-link connections BS-240XLU II Ext. / BS-240XLU IIB Base rack
Install the CAN-Bus connections between racks as described in section “4.4.10 CAN-
bus connections. The following cables are provided:
Cable
no.
Code-no. from
Base B-version
to
Extension A-version
length
601 S30864-
X215-A236
CU12...15, connector C CU12...15, connector B
connector A, not conn.
6,10 m
CU12...15 redundancy
connector D
CU12...15, connector B
connector A, not conn.
601 S30864-
X215-A236
CU16...23, connector C CU16...19, connector A
CU20...23, connector B
CU16...23 redundancy
connector D
CU16...19, connector A
CU20...23, connector B
Table 72 CC-cables l=6,10 m (mixed configuration with a gap between racks)
Code no. Cable length
S30864-X210-A12 1,90 m
S30864-X210-A14 3,30 m
Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 187/217
DN0932994 187
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
The DC cables from the Service1A rack to the Base and Extension rack have to be
prepared on site. For the selection of the cable type and the several installation steps,refer to section 4.6.1.
S30864-X210-A66 12,00 m
S30864-X210-A11 1,20 m
S30864-X210-A13 2,60 m
S30864-X210-A15 4,00 m
S30864-X210-A60 6,80 m
S30864-X210-A61 7,80 m
S30864-X210-A63 5,00 m
Code no. Cable length
Table 73 Overview of Can-Bus cables (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 188/217
188 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.8 Installation of link equipment
The link equipment acts as a front end, to provide the Abis interface. Different equipment
can be used for wire or radio transmission. Which equipment will be used depends on
customer requirements.
The number of link equipment, that can be installed depends on the height of the units.
g NOTE
For connections between Abis interface in the Base rack and link equipment in the
Service rack, pay attention to the recommendation CCITT G.703.
The receive level compared with the transmit level should not be lower than 6 dB.
For the installation of link equipment, the mounting kit MK:LE is needed always and
designed for 19” units. The MK:LE will fixed at the mounting bars on the right and left
side of the rack. 4 screws Torx T30 are needed for fixing.
The MK:LE holds the customer-dependent frames for microwave equipment or the
frame for 2 NTPM, F:NT (german market only).
The installation of link equipment in the mounting kit has always to start at the top of the
mounting kit below the DC-panel without a gap, so that the airflow inside the rack will
not be affected.
Figure 185 Mounting kit for link equipment MK:LE
MK:LE
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 189/217
DN0932994 189
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.8.1 Installation of microwave equipment
In case of microwave transmission, the indoor units inside the Service rack have to be
connected via the microwave antenna cables with the tower mounted outdoor units.
g NOTE
The outer insulation of the microwave antenna cables has to be removed in the area of
the cable feeding module for proper ground contact to the metal lids.
Connect the microwave antenna cables at the indoor units as follows:
1. Remove the front part of cable feeding module.
2. Feed the microwave cables through the cable feeding module forward to the front
connectors of microwave indoor units.
3. Fix the microwave cables at the front connectors of the indoor units. The connector
type and fixing torque depends on the equipment, provided by the customer.
4.
Bend the microwave cables into the a position that it is able to close the cablefeeding module without any pressure and tension.
5. Fix removable part in its original position.
6. Fix each cable at the strain reliefs of the feeding module with cable ties.
The next step is the connection of the microwave indoor units with the -48 VDC circuit of
the Service rack and the alarm lines at the spring terminals of the ACTC. Because con-
struction differences between the BS-240 and the BS-240 II rack, proceed in different
ways. In case of BS-240 Service racks perform the following steps:
1. Connect the microwave power supply / alarm cables (S30864-X211-A57) at the front
connectors of ACTC (see the following figure).
2. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.3. Attach equipment-specific connectors at the cable ends that should be connected to
the microwave units.
Figure 186 Cabling for link equipment (BS-240 / 240XL)
AL15_P µWave (white)
AL15_P AL_GND (black)
DC_µWave... PUE +0 V (red)
DC_µWave... MUE -48 V (blue)
microwave connector sup to 9 cablesS30864-K2045-X-*-7483
frame for link equipment
Service rack
1 2 3
4 5 6
97 8
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 190/217
190 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Install the DC-supply wires in case of the BS-240 II Service1A rack as follows:
1. Remove the cover plate of the DC-distribution block at the DC-panel.
2. Fit the breakers for link equipment (can be 4A breaker, V39118-Z4005-A91 or 10A,
V39118-Z4005-A91). The number of breakers depends on the volume of microwaveunits, that should be installed.
3. Connect the blue/black twisted wire pairs (cable no. 401, S30864-X215-A39) at the
2-pole connectors X25F (R)- X32F (R) of the DC-distribution block.
4. Route the cables down to the microwave units and fix them at the left subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
5. Attach the equipment-specific connector at the cable ends, that should be con-
nected at the DC-input of the microwave units.
Figure 187 Connection of the DC supply cables (cable no. 401)
Install the alarm line connection between the microwave units and the ACTC:
1. Measure the distance between the alarm output of the microwave units and theterminal block of the ACTC module in the F:ACTC-2V1.
2. Cut stranded wires with a cross section in the range of 0,08 mm2 - 0,5 mm2 (e.g.
LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 blue/black) to the required length.
3. Remove 10 mm of the insulation and attach the wires to the matching spring termi-
nals of the ACTC.
4. Route the wires down to the microwave units and fix the bundle at the right subrack
mounting bar with cable ties.
5. If necessary, equip the stranded wires with a connector. The type depends on the
alarm interface of the microwave units.
The installation steps of the DC-supply and alarm cables for the microwave units in the
BS-240 II Service2 racks are equal to the Service 1A rack. In this case, the ACTCmodule is part of the DC-panel and located on the right of the link equipment breakers.
In the DC-panels of the Service2 rack, the link equipment breakers BR01- BR06 (con-
nectors X25F (R) - X30F (R) can be used for the protection of the microwave units.
The following graphics should illustrate the DC cabling in both rack types.
remove the cover plate
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 191/217
DN0932994 191
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 188 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service1A (BS-240 II)
Figure 189 DC distribution block with microwave units in Service2 (BS-240 II)
The next step is the routing of the PCM-lines between the OVPT / ABISCON in the Base
rack and the PCM interfaces of the microwave indoor units. Therefore the pre-fabricated
cable S30864-X207-A8-*-7402 should be used. The cable is used as a splitter.
It consists of four single cables with Sub D-9 female connectors for the connection of a
microwave unit at each connector. The cables are attached to a common Sub D-25
female connector. The cable will be expanded with cable S30864-X211-A112 for the
connection with the OVPT / ABISCON.
BR01
4A or10A
BR02
4A or10A
BR06
4A or10A
BR05
4A or10A
BR03
4A or10A
BR04
4A or10A
BR07
4A or10A
BR08
4A or10A
-48 V
+0 V
X 2 5 R
X 2 5 F
X 3 0 R
X 3 0 F
X 2 9 R
X 2 9 F
X 3 2 R
X 3 2 F
X 3 1 R
X 3 1 F
X 2 7 R
X 2 7 F
X 2 8 R
X 2 8 F
X 2 6 R
X 2 6 F
m W
a v e 3
m W
a v e 2
m W
a v e 1
m W
a v e 0
m W
a v e 4
m W
a v e 7
m W
a v e 6
m W
a v e 5
m W a v e
9
m W a v e 1 1
m W a v e 1 0
m W a v e 8
example for 2 microwave units per breaker example for 1 microwave unit per breaker
cables no. 401cables no. 401
BR01
4A or10A
BR02
4A or10A
BR06
4A or10A
BR05
4A or10A
BR03
4A or10A
BR04
4A or10A
BR07
4A or10A
BR08
4A or10A
-48 V
+0 V
X 2 5 R
X 2 5 F
X 3 0 R
X 3 0 F
X 2 9 R
X 2 9 F
X 3 2 R
X 3 2 F
X 3 1 R
X 3 1 F
X 2 7 R
X 2 7 F
X 2 8 R
X 2 8 F
X 2 6 R
X 2 6 F
m W a v e 3
m W a v e 2
m W a v e 1
m W a v e 0
m W a v e 4
m W a v e 1 1
m W a v e 1 0
m W a v e 5
m W a v e 7
m W a v e 9
m W a v e 8
m W a v e 6
cables no. 401
A C T C , F A N
A C T C , D C I N
cable no. 408 407
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 192/217
192 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
An overview about the complete microwave cabling of both rack designs is given in the
following figure.
Signal Name Plug Sub D9 f Pin
No.
Plug Sub D25 Pin
No.
OVPT Terminal
Pin No.
cable no. S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
cable no. S30864-X211-A112
PCM 1 - ULA 1 1 22
PCM 1 - ULB 6 14 20
GND/G 3 3 18
PCM 1 - DLA 5 2 21
PCM 1 - DLB 9 15 19
GND/G --- --- 23
PCM 2 - ULA 1 4 16PCM 2 - ULB 6 16 14
GND/G 3 18 18
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5 15
PCM 2 - DLB 9 17 13
GND/G --- --- 17
PCM 3 - ULA 1 6 10
PCM 3 - ULB 6 19 8
GND/G 3 8 12
PCM 3 - DLA 5 7 9
PCM 3 - DLB 9 20 7
GND/G --- --- 11
PCM 4 - ULA 1 9 4
PCM 4 - ULB 6 21 2
GND/G 3 23 6
PCM 4 - DLA 5 10 3
PCM 4 - DLB 9 22 1
GND/G --- --- 5
GND/G --- --- 28
Table 74 Pre-fabricated cables between OVPT/ABISCON and the microwave units
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 193/217
DN0932994 193
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 190 Overview of microwave cabling
4.8.2 Installation of NTPM
In case of transmission via terrestrial lines, the NTPMs are placed inside the Service
rack, that is equipped with a mounting kit for NTPM, called frame F:NT.
gNOTE
It is necessary, to install a mounting kit MK:LE before mounting of the F:NT.
Each frame F:NT provides the equivalent space of 3 HU, allowing the installation of up
to 2 NTPM side by side.
The frame F:NT provides 3 interfaces:
– SubD 9, male with M3 fixings for -48 V output
– SubD 25, female with M3 fixings for PCM input
– SubD 25, male with M3 fixings for PCM output
PCM0
PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC
-48 Vdc supply and
Base Rack
to ODU
F:CORE
OVPT
Service Rack
SubD 9
Sub D 9
Sub D 25
Sub D 25
f
f
f
f m
m
m
m
PCM0PCM1
LE1-4
LE5-8
ACTC
Base Rack
to ODU
EMI panel
F:CORE
OVPT
Service Rack
rack front
Sub D 25
f
f
f
f
m
m
m
m
DC panel
alarm lines
twisted pair
breaker panel
top view
BS-240 II / 240XL II BS-240 / 240XL
EMI panel
top view
rack front
alarm lines
1)1)
1) integral part of cabinet cabling2)
3)4)
2)2)
has to be prepared on site
pair of stranded wires, e.g. C39195-Z75-C510 (Type: LI7Y 2x0,34/1,3 BL/SW VS)can be ordered as prepared cable (Octopus cable), order-no.: S30864-X207-A8-*-7402
can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X215-A39, (twisted pair, blue: -48 Vdc, black: 0 Vdc)5)
3)
4)
4)
4)
4)
can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30861-K2045-X-*-7483, (power cable for microwave module)6)
6)
7) 7)
7) can be ordered as prepared cable, order-no.: S30864-X211-A112
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 194/217
194 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
In case of the BS-240, the power supply cable from the frame F:NT to the ACTC is part
of the F:NT. For the BS-240 II Service1A / Service2 racks use the DC power cable
S30864-X216-A109 for the connections between the link equipment breakers (4A) and
the -48VDC input of the F:NT.
For the PCM connection between the OVPT/ABISCON and the F:NT the pre-fabricated
cable S30864-X211-A59 should be used. An overview of the cabling if the F:NT is
installed inside the racks is given in the following figure.
Figure 191 Overview of NTPM cabling variants
PCM0PCM1
ACTC
-48 V
Service Rack Base Rack
OVPT
PCM lines
EMI panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
rack front
BS-240 / 240XLBS-240 II / 240XL II
PCM0PCM1
ACTC
Service Rack Base Rack
OVPT
EMI panel
F:NT1
F:NT2
F:CORE
rack front
PCM lines
DC panel
1) Integral part of cabinet cabling2) has to be prepared on site
3) power supply cable: S30864-X216-A109
4) cable S30864-X211-A59
5)
1)1)
2)2)
3)-48Vdcsupply lines
4)4)
5)5)
2)
OVPT
PCM0 PCM1OVPT
PCM1PCM06) 6)
see Figure: Interface on frame F:NT
6) maximum of four PCM links per OVPT
7) 2 PCM links per F:NT if fully equipped with 2 modules
7)7)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 195/217
DN0932994 195
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 192 Interfaces on frame F:NT
Name F:NT -48 V, subD 9 female pin
0 V 1,2,6
-48 V 4,5,9
Table 75 Pin assignments of -48 V interface of frame F:NT
Signal name F:NT PCM-INPUT subD 25
female pin
F:NT PCM-OUTPUT subD 25
male pin
PCM 1 - ULA 1 1
PCM 1 - ULB 14 14
GND/G 3 3
PCM 1 - DLA 2 2
PCM 1 - DLB 15 15
GND/G 16 16
PCM 2 - ULA 4 4
PCM 2 - ULB 17 17
GND/G 6 6
PCM 2 - DLA 5 5
PCM 2 - DLB 18 18
GND/G 19 19
Table 76 Pin assignments of PCM-Input and -Output connector of frame F:NT
to OVPT / ABISCON
external PCM lines
- 48 VDC
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 196/217
196 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.9 Installation of modules and cover parts
For later extension or maintenance it is useful to have a basic knowledge about the
correct removal and replacement of the Core- and RF modules. Two variants for the
fixing of the modules in the subracks does exist. A lever mechanism will be used forfixing of the Core modules COBA and COSA. Fixing screws at the upper and lower edge
are used for securing of the RF modules.The handling is shown in the figure below.
Figure 193 Fixing variants of the modules
Figure 194 Handling of the lever mechanism
To prevent the installation of the plug-in modules at incorrect mounting positions, each
relevant modules provide code keys.
Module Code Key
DUAMCO 7FICOM 7
DIAMCO 8
CU 6
COBA 1
COSA 2
Table 77 Module HW code key
lever mechanism fixing screw
push together
lever mechanism in open position
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 197/217
DN0932994 197
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 195 Location of the code key no.
Pay attention to the following hints:
– After removal of a module check the proper condition of the code key plugs on the
backplane.
– Before a module will be plugged-in check the correct setting of the code key number,
this is to prevent damages at the backplane connectors.
– Insert the modules without any pressure.
All empty slots of a sub-rack have to be closed by cover parts, so that the proper air flow
inside the rack is guaranteed. Cover parts with different outer dimensions are provided.
The following table gives information about the relations between modules and cover
parts.
code number article name width applicable for:
S30861-K2019-X CP:CUV1 90 mm CU slots version 1
S30861-K2247-X CP:CUV2 90 mm CU slots version 2
S30861-K2020-X CP:DIAMCOV1 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 1
S30861-K2248-X CP:DIAMCOV2 60 mm DIAMCO slots version 2
S30861-K2021-X CP:ACOMV1 120 mm ACOM slots version 1
S30861-K2249-X CP:ACOMV2 120 mm ACOM slots version 2
S30861-K2022-X CP:COBA/COSAV1 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 1
S30861-K2250-X CP:COBA/COSAV2 28 mm COBA/COSA slots version 2
S30861-K2376-X CP:90MMV1 90 mm CU slots, with CP:30MMV1
together for ACOM slots
S30861-K2378-X CP:30MMV1 30 mm for core slots, HYBRID6 con-
figurations and together with
CP:90MMV1 for ACOM slots
Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules
2
code key no.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 198/217
198 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
S30861-K2379-X CP:24MMV1 *) 24 mm front panel for
MFDUAMCO_VX if
HYBRID4 module is notinstalled
*) CP:24MMV1consists of part C50117-A200-C841, delivered without 2D-label
code number article name width applicable for:
Table 78 Relations between cover parts and modules (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 199/217
DN0932994 199
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.10 Nonstandard installation works
4.10.1 Installation of the AC/DC frame
If an already installed BS-240 should be extended with Service2 racks to provide a
longer battery backup time, the installation of a second AC/DC frame inside the Service1
rack can be necessary.
The AC/DC frame consist of the parts as shown in the figure below.
Complete the air duct first, but do not mount the duct before insert the fan unit connec-
tors into the fitting holes at the rear of the AC/DC frame.
Figure 196 Components of the AC/DC frame
Complete the air duct as displayed in Figure 197 and in Figure 198 steps as follows:
– Insert both air flaps into the air duct frame, so that the flaps will be opened by the air
outlet stream.
– Cover the air duct edges with the 4 rubber sealings.
Figure 197 Fitting of the air flaps
AC/DC frame
air duct
air flaps
front cover
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 200/217
200 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
Figure 198 Setup of the rubber sealing
Mount the AC/DC frame inside the Service1 rack as follows:
– Setup the AC/DC frame in the position as shown in the figure below onto the battery
tray.
– Open the cable ring in the upper rear of the rack and select the fan cables no. 51
and no. 52.
– Insert the cable connectors into the fitting holes, so that the connectors can be easy
moved inside the hole.
– Pay attention to the correct cable no. because the connectors can not pulled out
without any damages.
Figure 199 Plug-in of the fan cables
Install the connections between AC/DC frame 1 and 2:
– Mount the prepared air duct at the rear of the AC/DC frame with both screws
provided with the air duct parts (see Figure 200).
– Disconnect cable 91 from the CAN-OUT connector at the backplane of the AC/DC
frame 1 (see Figure 200) and pull down the cable to AC/DC frame 2.
– Plug-in cable no. 89 at the CAN-OUT connector of AC/DC frame 1. The cable isprovided with AC/DC frame 2.
51 52
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 201/217
DN0932994 201
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 200 Air duct mounting, disconnection CAN-BUS cable no. 91
Figure 201 Connection CAN-BUS and interconnection cable
– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Figure 201.
– Plug-in the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at connector CAN-OUT of the AC/DC frame 1.
– Plug-in the interconnection cable no. 114 at the connector position as displayed in
Figure 201 at AC/DC frame 2.
– Connect the cables no. 91 and 114 as shown in Figure 202.
Figure 202 Cable connections at AC/DC frame 2
disconnect cable no. 91
screw
AC/DC frame 1
114
114
AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2
89
89
91
114
AC/DC frame 2 AC/DC frame 2
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 202/217
202 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
– Connect the CAN-BUS cable no. 89 at the CAN-IN connector of the AC/DC frame 2.
– Lift up the AC/DC frame to its mounting position (without gap below AC/DC frame 1).
– Fix the frame with 4 screws Torx T30.
Install the -48 V DC-connections to the DC-Panel of the Service1 rack and connectbattery systems BAT2 and BAT3.
– Connect the cables no. 107 and 108 at the DC clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2.
– Connect the cables no. 110/3 and 111/3 (BAT2), 110/4 and 111/4 (BAT3) at the DC
clamping block of the AC/DC frame 2 if BS-240 Service2 are used.
In case of BS-240 II Service2 racks the cables no. 110/3M and 111/3M (BAT2),
110/4M and 111/4M (BAT3) have to be connect (see figure below).
Figure 203 Connection of DC and battery cables
– Route the cable no. 229 (twisted pair wires, black / blue) from the AC/DC frame 2 tothe ACTC of the Service1 rack.
– Remove the jumper at the BB1connector of the ACTC and insert the plug of the
cable no. 229.
Figure 204 Routing of the battery breaker cable
Complete the installation of the AC/DC frame 2:
– Plug in both fan units. Push down the lids (see Figure 205) during the fitting.
– Fix the cover plates of the AC/DC frames 1 and 2.
108/A
108/B
107/A107/B 107/A
107/B108/A
108/B
110/3M
111/3M110/4M
111/4M
AC/DC frame 1 AC/DC frame 2
229
remove jumper
229
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 203/217
DN0932994 203
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Figure 205 Fitting of the fans, closing the AC/DC frame
4.10.2 Battery-upgrade of BS-240 Service racksThe mechanical and electrical preparation of the BS-240 Service Racks with AC/DC
systems from the supplier “Lambda”, is the precondition to integrate BS-240 II batteries.
The batterie-upgrade requires the following parts:
• Mounting kit S30861-K2350-X MK:TRAYV1 (cables, mounting guideline)
• Frame F:Battery Tray S30861-B4076-X
• Mounting kit MK:BATTFIXCBFVx S30861-K4258-X (battery fitting, breaker)
The following installation scenarios may be possible:
• Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an unused battery string of a BS-240
“Lambda”-AC/DC system with frames F:AC/DC1 or F:AC/DC2, 50A battery main
breaker in a BS-240. • Connection of a BS-240 II battery set to an existing BS-240 or BS-240 II battery set,
in order to expand the battery capacity.
f WARNING!
Before starting the battery-upgrading procedure, the relevant battery string must be sep-
arated fro mthe DC_supply by switching OFF the relevant 50ADC breaker of the
Service1 rack.
A minimum distance of 20 mm between DC- and signal lines and single insulated AC-
lines is mandatory.
During the installations works, follow the instructions of the mounting guideline S30861-
K2350-X-*-7428, provided with the installation material.
4.11 Setup of system cabling
The system cabling consists of connections are installed on the front of the rack. Cabling
configurations depend on the different equipping variants (e.g., type of combining,
capacity stage) and the cell configuration of the site.
The system cabling is already installed in the factory. This section provides information
for setup additional system cables for extension of RF modules or the cell configuration
must be changed.
press
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 204/217
204 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
System cables will be shipped in a box to avoid twisting and damage. Before starting the
connection procedure, refer to the site documentation and determine the types and
number of cables.
The list of variant numbers (content of the site specific documentation) is needed for thecorrect setup of the cabling between the modules.
g NOTE
For further informations refer to “Configuration Rules for System Cabling”.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 205/217
DN0932994 205
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.11.1 System cabling with semi-rigid cables
g NOTE
A minimum bending radius of 10 mm (semi-rigid.141 AI) and 3,5 mm (semi-rigid .86 AI)
must be ensured.
Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at
SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm.
Terminate all unused connectors of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!
Figure 206 Example of system cabling with semi-rigid cable
The following table provides an overview of the types and functionality of the prefabri-
cated cables.
connection code number length Path connector cable type
DUAMCO 0/3-
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-
C113
1600
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-
C118
1250
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3-
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-
C160
1250
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DUAMCO 1/2-
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-
C114
1050
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
FICOM-0/3
CU 0/1,4/5
C39195-Z80-
C160
1250
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
FICOM-1/2
CU 2/3,6/7
C39195-Z80-
C114
1050
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DIAMCO-0
CU 1,2/3,4/6,7
C39195-Z80-
C116
600
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DIAMCO-0/1
CU 0/5
C39195-Z80-
C117
750
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 206/217
206 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
g NOTE
In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short
semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors
(N-type, female) of the modules. Fix the cable at the N-type connectors and screw the
connection to a “fingertight” torque (approx. 1,00 Nm). Avoid the twisting of the cable
connectors during the connection.
DIAMCO-1
CU 2/3,4,6/7
C39195-Z80-
C116
600
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
HPDU (Rack)-
DIAMCO
C39195-Z80-
C174
1250
mm
RX SMA,90°,male/
N-Con,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
HPDU-
FICOM (Rack)
C39195-Z80-
C173
400
mm
TX 7/16,90°,male/
7/16,90°,male
1/2” jum-per
cable
DIAMCO (Rack
0)
DIAMCO (Rack
1)
C39195-Z80-
C176
2700
mm
Cas-
cad
SMA,90°,male/
N-Con,90°,male
Coax flexible
BIAS-T -
DIAMCO
C39195-Z80-
C181
1450
mm
RX SMA,90°,male/
N-Con,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
BIAS-T - HPDU C39195-Z80-
C180
410
mm
RX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
connection code number length Path connector cable type
DUAMCO 0/3- CU
0/1/6/7
C39195-Z80-
C206
1800
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3
CU 2/3/8/9
C39195-Z80-
C113
1600
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-
CU 4/5/10/11
C39195-Z80-
C118
1350
mm
RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
semi-rigid
.086 Al
DUAMCO 0/3- CU
0/1/6/7
C39195-Z80-
C204
1650
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-
CU 2/3/8/9
C39195-Z80-
C160
1250
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
DUAMCO 0/1/2/3-
CU 4/5/10/11
C39195-Z80-
C114
1050
mm
TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
semi-rigid
.141 Al
Table 80 Functionality of system cables BS-240XL / XL II
connection code number length Path connector cable type
Table 79 Functionality of system cables BS-240 / 240 II (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 207/217
DN0932994 207
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
4.11.2 System Cabling with flexi-cables
g NOTE
Fix the system cables at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set to 1,00 Nm and at
SMC connectors with a torque wrench set to 0,35 Nm. Terminate all unused connectors
of the antenna combiners with 50 Ohm load resistors!
The cables have to be routed in such a way that allows the ease exchange of modules
(CUs, Combiners and FANs). For this reason BTS Base-/Extension cabinets which have
been equipped with flexible HF cabling in the factory always, come with a pair of cable-
retainers fitted left-and right hand side at the bottom of each sub-rack (exception: lowest
subrack of a cabinet).
Route the cables, so that the LED-indications of the modules are visible and the test
adapter connectors are accessible.
The task of these cable retainers - which are bended sheet metal parts - is to keep those
flexible HF-cables in a neat position which inter-connect subracks.If a customer decides
to retrofit an 1th generation base station - which has not been equipped with cable-
retainers -with flexible HF cables, these cables must be loosely fitted with cable-ties.
g NOTE
Attention: Fitting of HF cables with cable-ties is not allowed for base stations equipped
with these cable retainers.
Figure 207 Example of system cabling with flexible cables
g NOTE
The minimum single bending radius of the flexible cables is 20 mm. The minimum
repeated bending radius is 40 mm. The exceptional length of the cables have to be
stored inside the vertical space between the subracks and the rack. The horizontal
space below each subrack have not to be used to store the extra length of the system
cables or anything else. This space is used as an air inlet for cooling.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 208/217
208 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
g NOTE
If a CU will be replaced by a FlexCU, EDGE-CU or GCU, make sure that the system
cables are installed as listed in the following table.
connection code number length Path connector
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A14 1800 mm RX SMC,90°,female/
SMC,90°,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A13 1600 mm RX SMC,90°,female/
SMC,90°,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A15 1400 mm RX SMC,90°,female/
SMC,90°,female
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A26 600 mm RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A27 750 mm RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A48 400 mm RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A50 1000 mm RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A51 1200 mm RX SMC,90°,male/
SMC,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A39 390 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A49 600 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A54 800 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A25 1050 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A24 1250 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A52 1400 mm TX SMA,90°,male/SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A23 1600 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU S30864-X217-A53 1800 mm TX SMA,90°,male/
SMA,90°,male
Table 81 BS-240 II / 240 XL II, system cables ACOM - FCU, ECU, GCU
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 209/217
DN0932994 209
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
g NOTE
In case of expansion of a FICOM base module with FICOM expansion modules, a short
semi-flex cable (C39195-Z80-C137) will be connected between the RF/EXP connectors
(N-type, female) of the modules. N-type connectors should work when 'finger tight".
There doesn't appear to be a consensus on how much torque this is in detail. Connector
suppliers recommends a torque of approx. 1,00 Nm. Avoid the twisting of the cable con-
nectors during the connection.
4.11.3 Terminators
It is necessary to terminate all unused RF-connectors of the RF-modules with 50 Ohm
load resistors.The following resistors are used:
– C39195-Z80-C30 for SMA connectors
– C39195-Z80-C31 for SMC connectors
Fix the terminators at SMA connectors with a torque wrench set 1.00 Nm and at SMC
connectors with a torque wrench set 0.35 Nm. Later removal of terminators must done
with extreme care, to avoid damages at the RF front connectors of the modules.
g NOTE
DUAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-
nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all
unused RX# connectors with a 50 Ohm SMC load resistor and RXCA# connectors with
a 50 Ohm SMA load resistor. In normal operation all open TX# inputs need not to be
terminated.
DIAMCO: If no RX and RXCA connector is used, the connectors need not to be termi-
nated. If at least one RX or RXCA connector is used, it is necessary to terminate all
unused RX# connectors and RXCA# connectors with a 50 Ohm load resistors.
FICOM: In normal operation all open TX connectors need not to be terminated. An open
expansion connector RF EXP has to be terminated with the terminator delivered with the
FICOM base module.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 210/217
210 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Rack completion
4.12 Post installation notes
4.12.1 Leaving the site
The following instructions must carried before leaving the site:
– At the end of the working day enable any alarms that should be active.
– Contact the Network Control Center to announce your departure.
– Close and lock the rack doors.
– Ensure the site is secure or hand over to the person in charge / caretaker
g NOTE
If the AC-supplied BTS will be not switched ON after the finished installation and is in
non-operational state disconnected from power supply, the BTS-internal battery system
must be disconnected by switching OFF the common battery circuit breaker BR33
(located at the AD-panel of Service1 cabinet).
In case that the BTS is remotely disconnected from the external power supply, all its AC
circuit breakers must be switched OFF to deenergize the system reliably.
If all installation activities are finished, any garbage must be cleared from site. Remove
all packing material for later recycling.
f WARNING!
The burning of rubbish should be avoided, as a burning of packaging material may give
off toxic gases.
g NOTE
For dehydrating the rack during transportation and storage, a bag filled with Silica Gel
is fitted into the rack by the factory. It is recommended to remove the bag, because after
a certain time the bag lost his function.
4.12.2 Disposal of electrical and electronic equipment
The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help prevent
potential negative consequences for the environment and human health. It is a precon-
dition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your
sales representative.
The statements quoted above are only fully valid for equipment which is installed in thecountries of the European Union and is covered by the directive 2002/96/EC.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 211/217
DN0932994 211
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Rack completion
Id:0900d8058088d65c
Confidential
Countries outside the European Union may have other regulations regarding the
disposal of electrical and electronic equipment.
All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the
municipal waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the governmentor the local authorities.
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 212/217
212 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805805b0be3
Confidential
Appendix
5 Appendix
5.1 Installation toolsThe following tools are necessary to install the base stations:
– Standard toolkit for BSS-installation H89999-B633
– Tool set for BS-24x installation H89999-B148
– ESD safety tool set H89999-B635-V1
– Spirit level
– Tape measure
– Scissors
– Plate shears
– Screw driver for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm
– Torque wrench for SMA connectors 0.74 ft Ib (1.0 Nm), SMC connectors 0.25 ft Ib(0.35 Nm)
– Torque wrench 32 mm (12...35 Nm) for 7/16” connector mounting
– Insulated hexagonal socket screw key or ratchet (M6)
– Isolated torque wrench for Torx T30 (6 Nm) and open ended 17 mm (20 Nm) for
battery mounting
– screwdriver for torx screws T8, T10, T15, T20, T25, T30, T40, T50 (length 200 mm)
– Long screwdriver for torx screws T30 (length 400 mm)
– Engineer‘s wrenches for M12, M42 (SW 19, 65 mm)
– Ratchet with insets for nuts M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16 (7, 8, 10, 13, 17, 19,
24 mm)
– Torx screw drivers for security screw (with pin) T10, T25
– Screwdrivers for hexagonal socket screw or hexagonal socket screw key SW 4 mm
– Screwdriver for slotted screw M3, M4, M5
– Screwdriver for pozi drive screws M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8
– Stripping knife for 1/2” RF cables
– Trimming tool for 1/2” coaxial cables
– Flat brush, 20 mm width
– Hot air gun or butane torch
– Crimping tool (Hoffmann Order Nr.: 72942 Gr. 35 or Tyco AMP Order Nr.:734650-1)
– 90° offset screw driver for torx screws T20
– Adjuster feed wrench M42 (SW65)
– Flat spanner SW19, SW50
– Hammer drill with twisted drills widia, diameter 8 mm, 18 mm (for fixing of earth-
quake mounting kit only)
– Fall protection equipment for working in dangerous heights (e.g. TMA mounting)
– Vacuum cleaner
– Hard hat
– Dust mask
– Safety goggles
– Safety gloves
– 4 ft step ladder
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 213/217
DN0932994 213
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Appendix
Id:0900d805805b0be3
Confidential
Additional tools may be necessary for the installation of the power supply equipment,
antennas, transmission equipment, cable-ways and other infrastructure equipment.
Refer for additional information to the Tool and Testequipment Database in the Intranet:
https://tte-support.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/tte/
5.2 Ancillary material
The following ancillary materials are needed:
– adhesive tape
– cable ties in different lengths
– wire end sleeves for 16 mm² copper wires
– cable lugs M8
– paint retouch kit (order no. A500-C101-B261)
– heat-shrink set including: heat-shrink sleeve for 1/2” coaxial cables (with adhesive
coating), cleaning tissue, heat protection tape, emery paper
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 214/217
214 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805805b0be3
Confidential
Appendix
5.3 Technical data
5.3.1 Technical data BS-240 / BS-240 II / BS-240 IIB
Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II BS-240 IIB
overall dimensions (HxWxD) 1600 x 600 x 450 mm 1530 x 600 x 450 mm
weights:
rack (unequipped):
frame with 4 ACOM
frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM
frame with 4 CU
frame with 6 AC/DC
frame with battery set*
DC Panel*dependend on battery type
60 kg / 60 kg
40 kg / 40 kg
40 kg / 40 kg
30 kg / 30 kg
27 kg / 35 kg
130-180 kg / 130-180 kg
10 kg
40 kg
30 kg
30 kg
25 kg
35 kg
130-180 kg
10 kg
mains input voltage (nominal):
input voltage range:
-48 Vdc
-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc
mains input voltage (nominal):
input voltage range:
frequency (nominal):
frequency range:
3 x 230 Vac
207 Vac to 253 Vac
50 Hz
45 Hz to 65 Hz
AC/DC converter
nominal output power
1600 W 2000 W
power consumption:TMA
AMCO
MUCO
CU (GSM)
ECU (Edge)
FCU
COBA
COSA
DC panel
frame
ACOMbattery set
9 W
25,5 W
12,5 W
150 W per module
210 W per module
310 W per module
17 W
17 W
10 W
60 W
43 W20 W
location condition: indoor
Abis link media: wire, fibre optic, microwave
CU per single rack: max. 8
multiple cell per BTSE max. 12
no. of CU per Cell 1 - 12
Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 215/217
DN0932994 215
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Appendix
Id:0900d805805b0be3
Confidential
5.3.2 Technical data BS-240XL / BS-240XL II / BS-240 XL IIB
external interfaces:
TX/RX antenna
Abis interface
mains input AC
mains input DC
ground connection
external alarms
LMT
7/16, female
terminal block (120 Ohm) or 1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)
terminal block (max. AWG 8)
terminal block (max. AWG 6), BS-240
terminal block (max. AWG 2), BS-240 II,
BS-240XL / XL II
bolt M8
spring terminal blocks
SubD 15, female, RJ45 connector
Parameter BS-240 / BS-240 II BS-240 IIB
Table 82 Technical data of BS-240 / 240 II / 240 / 240 IIB (Cont.)
Parameter BS-240XL / 240 XL II BS-240 XL IIB
overall dimensions (HxWxD) 2025 x 600 x 450 mm 1831 x 600 x 450 mm
weights:
rack (unequipped):
frame with 4 ACOM
frame with 4 CU + 1 ACOM
frame with 4 CU
frame with 6 AC/DCframe with battery set*
DC Panel
*dependend on battery type
80 kg / 80 kg
40 kg /40 kg
40 kg / 40 kg
30 kg / 30 kg
27 kg / 35 kg130-180 kg / 130-180 kg
15 kg
50 kg
30 kg
30 kg
25 kg
35 kg130-180 kg
15 kg
mains input voltage (nominal):
input voltage range:
-48 Vdc
-40,5 Vdc up to -57 Vdc
mains input voltage (nominal):
input voltage range:
frequency (nominal):
frequency range:
3 x 230 Vac
207 Vac to 253 Vac
50 Hz
45 Hz to 65 Hz
AC/DC converter
nominal output power
1600 W 2000 W
Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 216/217
216 DN0932994
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Id:0900d805805b0be3
Confidential
Appendix
power consumption:
TMA
AMCOMUCO
CU (GSM)
ECU (Edge)
FCU
COBA
COSA
DC panel
frame
ACOM
battery set
9 W
25,5 W12,5 W
150 W per module
210 W per module
310 W per module
17 W
17 W
10 W
60 W
43 W
20 W
location condition: indoor
Abis link media: wire , fibre optic, microwave
CU per single rack: max. 12
external interfaces:
TX/RX antenna
Abis interface
mains input AC
mains input DC
ground connection
external alarms
LMT
7/16, female
terminal block (120 Ohm) or
1.0/2.3 coaxial connectors female (75 Ohm)terminal block (max. AWG 8)
terminal block (max. AWG 2
bolt M8
spring terminal blocks
SubD 15, female, RJ45 connector
Parameter BS-240XL / 240 XL II BS-240 XL IIB
Table 83 Technical data of BS-240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB (Cont.)
8/18/2019 BS-240 240 II 240 IIB 240XL 240XL II
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bs-240-240-ii-240-iib-240xl-240xl-ii 217/217
InstallingBS-240 / 240 II / 240 IIB / 240XL / 240XL II / 240 XL IIB
Appendix
5.4 Checklist for Base Station Installation
Check Item Yes No
Rack fixed to floor and wall (wall excepted in erthquake zones)
Grounding
BTS connected to ground as described in section “External
Cabling Activities”
Cable screens of all cables connected to ground at the cable
window of the building
Power Supply
Cross section of power supply cable sufficient